Chrysler - 200 - Owners Manual - 2013 - 2013 (2)

2013 OWNER’S MANUAL 200 VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. WARNING! Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. Copyright © 2012 Chrysler Group LLC SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 3 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 4 5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 5 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 6 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 7 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 8 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 9 10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 10 INTRODUCTION CONTENTS 䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6 䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7 䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 1 4 INTRODUCTION When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techCongratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group nicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision your satisfaction. workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL INTRODUCTION This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire. Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment. The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects. NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout ing and remain with the vehicle when sold. this Owner’s Manual: INTRODUCTION 5 1 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This number also appears stamped on the right front door sill under the sill moulding and printed on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title. Vehicle Identification Number INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS WARNING! Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Stamped VIN Location NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN. 1 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 CONTENTS 䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 ▫ Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 ▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 ▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 ▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 ▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 ▫ Locking the Doors with the Key . . . . . . . . . . . .15 䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .21 䡵 SENTRY KEY威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 ▫ To Unlock The Doors. . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 ▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . 䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 ▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 . . . . . . . . .22 . . . . . . . . .25 . . . . . . . . .26 . . . . . . . . .26 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . .26 ▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .26 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 䡵 REMOTE START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . .28 ▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 ▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 ▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 ▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 ▫ Auto Window Up With Anti-Pinch Protection — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 ▫ Window Lockout Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 䡵 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 䡵 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 ▫ Trunk Internal Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . .41 䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .50 䡵 POWER WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 ▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . .51 ▫ Power Window Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 ▫ Rear Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 ▫ Auto Window Down — If Equipped . . . . . . . .37 ▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . .52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 ▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 ▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 ▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 ▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) . . .54 ▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .66 ▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 ▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 ▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .96 ▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System 䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 (BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 ▫ Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 ▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .59 ▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 ▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 ▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside ▫ Supplemental Restraint System The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 (SRS) — Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make ▫ Air Bag System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 ▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . .62 2 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your authorized dealer. Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place. You can insert the double-sided keys into the locks with either side up. Vehicle Key Ignition Key Removal Automatic Transaxle Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position, push the key and cylinder inward, rotate the key to the LOCK position, and remove the key. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 NOTE: • If you try to remove the key before you place the shift lever in PARK, the key may become trapped temporarily in the ignition switch lock cylinder. If this occurs, rotate the key to the right slightly, then remove the key as described. If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in the ignition switch lock cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped, but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service. Ignition Switch Positions 1 — LOCK 2 — ACC (ACCESSORY) 3 — ON/RUN 4 — START • For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either door will cancel this feature. 2 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE • For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. WARNING! • Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the Key Fob from the ignition. When leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. CAUTION! An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always remove key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 key forward. For door lock lubrication, see “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” of this Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition manual. sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key. Key-In-Ignition Reminder NOTE: SENTRY KEY姞 • The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when the The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System prevents unauthorignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position. ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation • With either front door open, and the key in the is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked ignition, both the power door locks and Remote Key- or unlocked. less Entry (RKE) transmitter will not function. The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded Locking the Doors with the Key electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized There is only one external door lock cylinder which is vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate located in the driver’s door. the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the door, turn the key rearward. To unlock the door, turn the engine. 2 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: A key which has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle. During normal operation, after turning on the ignition switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid key to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds. CAUTION! The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system is not compatible with some after-market remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection. All of the keys provided with your vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics. Replacement Keys NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 a Sentry Key威 has been programmed to a vehicle, it seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron- cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 CAUTION! Always remove the Sentry Key威 from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. Customer Key Programming You can program new keys to the system if you have two valid Sentry Keys威 by performing the following procedure: At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided 1. Cut the additional Sentry Key威 Transponder blank(s) with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN). to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code. The PIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an 2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position for at authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Proleast three seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. gramming procedure. This procedure consists of proThen, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position gramming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank and remove the first key. key is one which has never been programmed. NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer 3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to the within 15 seconds. After ten seconds, a chime will authorized dealer. sound. In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key. 2 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 4. Insert a blank Sentry Key威 into the ignition switch. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position within 60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound. In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing. To indicate that programming is complete, the indicator light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off. NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the systems memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to your authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed. General Information The new Sentry Key威 is programmed. The Remote The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules part 15 Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be proand with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is grammed during this procedure. subject to the following conditions: Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you • This device may not cause harmful interference. do not have a programmed Sentry Key威 contact your • This device must accept any interference that may be authorized dealer for details. received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors and trunk rearm itself. for unauthorized entry and ignition switch for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security Alarm is To Arm The System armed, interior switches for door locks and decklid 1. Remove the keys from the ignition switch and get out release are disabled. of the vehicle. If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security 2. Lock the door using either the power door lock switch Alarm will signal for about 18 minutes. For the first 3 (one door must be open) or the LOCK button on the minutes, the horn will sound intermittently, the headRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter (doors can be lights will turn on, the park lamps and/or turn signals open or closed), and close all doors. will flash and the Vehicle Security Light in the cluster will flash. Then the exterior lights will flash for another 15 NOTE: The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you minutes. lock the doors with the manual door lock plungers. VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED Rearming The System If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the 2 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3. The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash for 16 seconds. This shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming. During this period, if a door is opened, the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN, or the power door locks are unlocked in any manner, the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm. To Disarm The System Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or insert a valid Sentry Key威 into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON/START position. NOTE: • The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle • During the 16-second arming period, if a door is Security Alarm. opened or the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN, the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm. • The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during trunk entry. Pressing the trunk button will not disarm • Once armed, the Vehicle Security Alarm disables the the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters the unlock switch on the driver door trim panel and vehicle through the trunk and opens any door, the passenger door trim panel, the trunk release button on alarm will sound. the instrument panel, and the HomeLink威/Garage The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your Door Opener (if equipped). vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm. If one NOTE: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected. The exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED The courtesy lights will turn on when you press the unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open any door. This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. The interior lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the Tamper Alert ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF If the alarm was triggered, but the warning signals have position. timed out, the park and taillights flash three times, and the horn will chirp three times, when unlocking the NOTE: vehicle with a valid RKE transmitter to alert the driver. • The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights will remain on if the dimmer control is in the ⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position). 2 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE • The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position (extreme bottom position). REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF EQUIPPED This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors, open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. NOTE: Vehicle Key • The line of transmission must not be blocked with To Unlock The Doors metal objects. Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE • Inserting the key into the ignition switch disables all transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice to unlock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash to buttons on the RKE transmitter. acknowledge the unlock signal. The Illuminated Entry system (if equipped) will also turn on. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the current setting, proceed as follows: 2. Release both buttons at the same time. 3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed. 4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to • For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle its previous setting. Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle NOTE: If there is no key in the ignition switch, pressing Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understandinside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. system. Opening a door with the system activated will • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to following procedure: deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm system. 1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button. 2 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transThe feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when mitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitkey removed. ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, proceed as follows: 4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting. • For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle NOTE: If there is no key in the ignition switch, pressing Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand- the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. system. Opening a door with the system activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm system. following procedure: Illuminated Approach — If Equipped 1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but not longer This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles button while still holding the UNLOCK button. equipped with EVIC. For details, refer to “Electronic 2. Release both buttons at the same time. Flash Lights With Lock THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the following steps: (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. 1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but not longer than 10 To Lock The Doors seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while still Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitholding the LOCK button. ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal. 2. Release both buttons at the same time. Sound Horn With Lock 3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed. are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or off. To change the current setting, proceed as 4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to follows: its previous setting. • For vehicles equipped with EVIC, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. 2 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: If there is no key in the ignition switch, pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm. To Unlatch The Trunk The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater. NOTE: You may need to be close to the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the Radio Frequency (RF) noises emitted by the system. Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two Programming Additional Transmitters times to unlatch the trunk. Refer to Sentry Key威 “Customer Key Programming.” Using The Panic Alarm If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter, To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the headlights turn on, the park lights will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the Illuminated Entry system (if equipped) will turn on. contact your authorized dealer for details. Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032. NOTE: Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 1. With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down, use a 2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the flat blade screwdriver to pry the two halves of the RKE new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the seal battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it during removal. with rubbing alcohol. 3. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two halves together. General Information This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. Separating RKE Transmitter Halves 2. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation. 2 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap- NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic proved by the party responsible for compliance could transmission to be equipped with Remote Start. void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. How To Use Remote Start If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal All of the following conditions must be met before the distance, check for these two conditions: engine will remote start: 1. Weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected life • Shift lever in PARK of a battery is five years. • Doors closed 2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some • Hood closed mobile or CB radios. • Trunk closed REMOTE START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED • Hazard switch off • Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed) This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve- • Ignition key removed from ignition switch niently from outside the vehicle while still • Battery at an acceptable charge level maintaining security. The system has a range of • RKE PANIC button not pressed approximately 300 ft (91 m). THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 • System not disabled from previous remote start event Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped • Vehicle theft alarm not active The following messages will display in the EVIC if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start premaWARNING! turely: • Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon- • Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon • Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in• Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Ajar jury or death when inhaled. • Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters • Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other controls • Remote Start Aborted — System Fault could cause serious injury or death. The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position. 2 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle. NOTE: the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle. Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur: • The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500 • Any engine warning lamps come on • Low Fuel Light turns on • The hood is opened • If an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and • The hazard switch is pressed then shut down 10 seconds later. • The transmission is moved out of PARK • For security, power window operation is disabled • The brake pedal is pressed when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode. • The engine can be started two consecutive times (two 15 minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However, THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle. trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system inside door handle. will disable the one-time press of the Remote Start button for two seconds after receiving a valid remote start request. To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle, press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if equipped). Then insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON/RUN position. NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle. Manual Lock Knob 2 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! CAUTION! • For personal security and safety in the event of an collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves. Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. Power Door Locks A door lock switch is located on the driver and passenger door panel. Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer. Please see your authorized dealer for service. Auto Unlock On Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if: 1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled. 2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph (0 km/h). Power Door Lock Switch Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped 3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK. 4. The driver door is opened. The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically 5. The doors were not previously unlocked. when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The 6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h). 2 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows: 5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting. • For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings in accordance with local laws. (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “UnderstandChild-Protection Door Lock System — Rear ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Doors • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the To provide a safer environment for children riding in the following procedure: rear seat, the rear doors of your vehicle have a ChildProtection Door Lock system. 1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition. Auto Unlock On Exit Programming 2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON/ RUN and then back to LOCK four times, ending up in the LOCK position. 3. Press the power door unlock switch to unlock the doors. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 2 Child-Protection Door Lock Location The Child-Protection Door Locks are located inside the rear edge of the door. Insert the tip of the ignition key or similar flat-bladed object into the lock and rotate approximately one-quarter turn to the lock or unlock position (as indicated by the stamped icons). Child Lock Control WARNING! Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision. Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are engaged. 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the lock knob up (UNLOCKED position), roll down the window, and open the door with the outside door handle. POWER WINDOWS Power Window Switches The control on the driver’s door has up/down switches that give you fingertip control of all four power windows. AUTO Power Window Switch There is a single window control on the front and rear passenger’s door trim panel, which operates the front and rear passenger door windows. The window controls will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC position, and when the accessory delay feature is active. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 WARNING! To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch either in the up or down direction and release the switch. Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either door will cancel this feature. Auto Window Down — If Equipped The front window controls on the driver and passenger door trim panels have an Auto-Down feature. These switches are labeled AUTO to indicate this capability. Push the window switch past the first detent, release, and the window will go down automatically. To open the window part way, push the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop. For vehicles equipped with EVIC, the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening either door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. 2 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Auto Window Up With Anti-Pinch Protection — If Equipped NOTE: • If the window runs into any obstacle during autoclosure, anti-pinch protection will reverse the window direction and then go back down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window. To cancel the Auto Up movement, operate the switch either in the up or down direction and release the switch. • Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during autoTo close the window part way, lift the window switch to closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the the first detent and release it when you want the window first detent and hold to close window manually. to stop. Lift the window switch fully upward to the second detent, release, and the window will go up automatically. WARNING! When the window is almost closed, there is no anti-pinch protection. To avoid personal injury, be sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the window path before closing. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 Reset Auto Up Anytime the vehicle battery goes dead, the Auto Up function will be disabled. To reactivate the Auto Up feature, pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed. 2 Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows you to disable the window control on the other doors. To disable the window controls on the other doors, press the window LOCK button. To enable the window controls, press the window control button again. AUTO Power Window Switch Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting. TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE Use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to open the trunk from outside the vehicle. From inside the vehicle the trunk lid can be released by pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. NOTE: The shift lever must be in PARK for this button to operate. To unlatch the trunk lid from outside the vehicle, press and release the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two times. With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, the word “dECK ” will display in place of the odometer display indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display will reappear once the trunk is closed or if the trip button is depressed. With the ignition switch in the LOCK position or with the key out, the word “dECK” will display until the trunk is closed. On EVIC-equipped vehicles, the words “Trunk Ajar” will display. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING WARNING! 2 Do not allow children to have access to the trunk, either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in the trunk, young children may not be able to escape, even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or heat stroke. Trunk Internal Emergency Release As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the glow-in-thedark handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism. Trunk Internal Emergency Release 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS • Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants Some of the most important safety features in your • Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may vehicle are the restraint systems: enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event • Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating positions • All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the • Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt passenger all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the • Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large on top of the front seats (integrated into the head item in a seat. restraint) — if equipped Please pay close attention to the information in this • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) section. It tells you how to use your restraint system for the driver and passengers seated next to a window properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible. • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) • An energy-absorbing steering column and steering If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether wheel for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 infant and child restraint systems. For more information on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH). NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on several factors, including the severity and type of collision. WARNING! Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position. Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be risk of harm from a deploying air bag: secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltposition1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride ing booster seats. Older children who do not use child buckled up in a rear seat. restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm. If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”) 2 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly. 2. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly. 3. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate. 4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door. 5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under (If You Need Assistance”. WARNING! • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags. • Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel. (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 WARNING! (Continued) • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat. • In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly. • Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed. Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street. Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times. Lap/Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts. 2 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out. WARNING! • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body. These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best. • Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. • Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat. 2 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, next to your arm. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap. Pulling Out The Latch Plate 3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you. • A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 WARNING! • A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision. • A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together. 4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision. Positioning The Lap Belt 2 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug. • A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed. 5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt. 6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully. WARNING! A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ shoulder belt. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point. 2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate. 2 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate. 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing. Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seat, the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck. Push anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position that serves you best. Adjustable Anchorage As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average, you will prefer a higher position. When you release the anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position. 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Rear Seat Belts Driver N/A ALR The shoulder belt anchorages of the rear three-point belts First Row are nonadjustable for outboard and center rear passenSecond Row gers on sedans. The center belt is mounted to the rear • N/A — Not Applicable shelf panel and exits through a bezel in the panel. Center N/A ALR Passenger ALR ALR Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions • ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) which are used to secure a child restraint system. For additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position. If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage: Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙ THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If Equipped In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat. How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted. 3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode. How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. WARNING! • The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual. • Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions. 2 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy worn snugly and positioned properly. Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretencollision. sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately. designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) the occupant’s chest. These head restraints are passive, deployable compoSeat Belt Pretensioners nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily The seat belts for both front seating positions are identified by any markings, only through visual inspecequipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and These devices may improve the performance of the seat trim, the back half being decorative plastic. Energy Management Feature belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear impact requires deployment, both the driver and front passenger seat AHRs will be deployed. When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR. This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts. 2 Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may 1 — Head Restraint Front Half not deploy in the event of a front or side impact. (Soft Foam and Trim) 2 — Seatback However if during a front impact, a secondary rear impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the impact. 3 — Head Restraint Back Half (Decorative Plastic Rear Cover) 4 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! 1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat. All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a collision. NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”. Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR) Hand Positioning Points On AHR If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision, 2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and a comfortable position. front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they have moved forward (as shown in step three of the resetting procedure). THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism. 2 3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism 1 — Downward Movement 2 — Rearward Movement 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock • For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints into the back decorative plastic half. checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer. Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert姞) BeltAlert威 is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger (if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert威) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened. The BeltAlert威 warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt NOTE: Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. • If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened. Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer. After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder AHR In Reset Position THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert威 will provide both audio and visual notification. The front passenger seat BeltAlert威 is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert威 may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed. NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with BeltAlert威) seat belt remains unfastened. Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe. Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible. Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision. BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deac- Seat Belt Extender tivating BeltAlert威. If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized 2 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the extender should be used only if the existing belt is not instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex- words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers. tender and store it. WARNING! Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug, and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the extender when not needed. Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat 1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air 2 — Knee Bolster Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 NOTE: The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Bags are certified to new Federal regulations. Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next to a window. If the The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator vehicle is equipped with SABIC, they are located above design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of the side windows. The trim covering the side air bags is inflation that are based on several factors, including the labeled SRS AIRBAG. severity and type of collision. This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental SeatThis vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the protection for an occupant during a side impact. The inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon SABs are located in the outboard side of the front seats. seat position. This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front NOTE: passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether • Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The but they will open during air bag deployment. seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an Advanced Front Air Bags. authorized dealer immediately. 2 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Air Bag System Components Advanced Front Air Bag Features Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage system components: driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), • Air Bag Warning Light which may receive information from the front impact • Steering Wheel and Column sensors. • Instrument Panel The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output • Knee Impact Bolster is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is • Driver Advanced Front Air Bag used for more severe collisions. • Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) • Front and Side Impact Sensors • Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch, and Seat Track Position Sensors THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 WARNING! • No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel, because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate. • Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating. • Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way. • Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label 2 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air bag only. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) SABIC air bags may offer side-impact protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for sideimpact head injuries. The SABIC air bags deploy downward, covering both windows on the impact side. Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) Location THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 NOTE: • Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim; but they will open during air bag deployment. • Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed. The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that require air bag occupant protection. WARNING! • Your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC. The area where the SABIC is located should remain free from any obstructions. • Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side air bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury. (Continued) 2 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason. • Do not allow occupants to extend any part of their body outside of the window. protection for the driver and front passenger. Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection. Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle. The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required. Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic Knee Impact Bolsters ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air The Knee Impact Bolster helps protect the knees of the bags, Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags, and front passenger, and position the front occupant for the front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on the severity and type of impact. best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bag. Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addiAir Bags work with the bolsters to provide improved tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on several factors, THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 including the severity and type of collision. Advanced Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colliFront Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag. injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration. The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions. Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision. The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate. The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition is first turned on. After the Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it have deployed. 2 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light Inflator Units comes on again after initial startup. The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru- Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel. noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos- When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large tics also record the nature of the malfunction. quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates WARNING! are possible, based on several factors, including the Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru- collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while air bag system immediately. helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the you if you are not seated properly, or if items are vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This especially applies to children. bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB) Inflator Units Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Inflator Units The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are During collisions where the impact is confined to a designed to activate only in certain side collisions. particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle. collision. A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30 inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very are not belted and seated properly, or if items are high speed and with such a high force that it could injure positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag 2 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE inflates. This especially applies to children. The side • Cut off fuel to the engine. curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or it is inflated. until the ignition key is turned off. Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time, • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of the battery has power or until the ignition key is whether or not an air bag should have deployed. removed. Front And Side Impact Sensors • Unlock the doors automatically. In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System ORC in determining appropriate response to impact functions after an event, the ignition switch must be events. changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF. Enhanced Accident Response System If A Deployment Occurs In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate the communication network remains intact, and the immediately after deployment. power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow- collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with ing functions: the air bag system. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 If you do have a collision, which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur: continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning. • The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have defront passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those bags will not be in place to protect you. you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. WARNING! They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retracimmediately. tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Conparticles. The particles are a normal by-product of the troller System serviced as well. process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation 2 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! • Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards. • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system. (Continued) • Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Air Bag Warning Light • The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval. You will want to have the air bags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision. The Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components. While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free. If any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. • The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving. NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the • The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is fuse is good. first turned to the ON/RUN position. 2 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE These data can help provide a better understanding of This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will the EDR under normal driving conditions and no perassist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per- sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to are recorded. However, other parties, such as law envehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle personally identifying data routinely acquired during a is designed to record such data as: crash investigation. Event Data Recorder (EDR) • How various systems in your vehicle were operating; To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, were buckled/fastened; such as law enforcement, that have the special equip• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the ment, can read the information if they have access to the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, vehicle or the EDR. • How fast the vehicle was traveling. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all Standards. You should also make sure that you can install times, including babies and children. Every state in the it in the vehicle where you will use it. United States, and every Canadian province, requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This NOTE: For additional information, refer to is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. CanaChildren 12 years or younger should ride properly dian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s webbuckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash site for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/ statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in eng/roadsafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm Child Restraints the rear seats rather than in the front. There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child. WARNING! In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size. 2 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Infants and Toddlers Small Children Larger Children Children Too Large for Child Restraints Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint Children who are at least two years old or who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint Children who have out-grown their forward-facing child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt Children 12 years old or younger, who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat Recommended Type of Child Restraint Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardfacing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats. The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rearwardfacing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearwardfacing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat. WARNING! • Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearward facing infant seat. • Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who 2 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat. All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt. WARNING! • Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. • When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury. Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the the child’s thighs and not their stomach? vehicle’s seat belt alone: 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip? 1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the the vehicle seat? child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit periof the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the odically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the way back? belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle. 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm between their neck and arm? or behind their back. 2 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Restraint Type Combined Weight of the Child + Child Restraint Rear-Facing Child Restraint Rear-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below LATCH – Seat Belt Only LATCH – Seat Belt + Top Lower Anchors Lower Anchors Tether Anchor Only + Top Tether Anchor X X X X X X THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) Restraint System Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information. 2 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position Top Tether Anchorage Symbol THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint? 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint? Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages? No Yes Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt alone instead of the LATCH anchorage system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint. You can install child restraints with flexible lower anchors in the center position. Do not install child restraints with rigid lower anchors in the center position. 2 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage? No Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat? Yes Can the head restraints be removed? No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position. The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 Locating The LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along gap between the seatback and seat cushion. 2 Rear Seat LATCH Anchorages 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Locating The LATCH Anchorages In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window. These tether strap anchorages are under a plastic cover with the tether anchorage symbol on it. Tether Strap Anchorages LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage. Center Seat LATCH WARNING! (Continued) seat belt for installing child seats in the outboard positions. Please refer to “Installing The LATCHCompatible Child Restraint System” for typical installation instructions. Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attachments in the center seating position. Only install this type of child restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child Always follow the directions of the child restraint manurestraints with flexible, webbing mounted lower attach- facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here. ments can be installed in any rear seating position. To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint WARNING! Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint. If you are installing LATCHcompatible child restraints next to each other, you must use the seat belt for the center position. You can then use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s (Continued) 1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating position has. 2 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the 6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint tether strap of the child seat so that you can more rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufaceasily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle turer’s instructions. anchorages. 3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for 7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt that seating position. For some second row seats, you path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. in any direction. 4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat- When using the LATCH attaching system to install a ing position. child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being 5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the used by other occupants or being used to secure child top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc- with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, tions to attach a tether anchor. buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89 behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them. WARNING! Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. For additional information on ALR, refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.” The cinching latch plate is designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a child restraint’s belt path. Please see the table below and the following sections for more information about both types of seat belts. 2 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child Restraints in this Vehicle What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint? 65 lbs (29.5 kg) The Tether Anchor can be used with the seat belt until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt without the Tether Anchor once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg). THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91 Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat? Yes Can the head restraints be removed? Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint? No Yes Installing A Child Restraint with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. 2 In positions with cinching latch plates (CINCH), the buckle stalk may be twisted up to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor. 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” 1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight position. For some second row seats, you may need to against the child seat. recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path. 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode. attach a tether anchor. 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is 9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by locked, you should not be able to pull out any webpulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5. path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction. 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the the child restraint rearward and downward into the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. vehicle seat. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93 4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the 1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating vehicle seat. position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get 5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the a better fit. seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether 2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chilretractor to pass it through the belt path of the child dren (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt attach a tether anchor. path. 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt “click.” path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction. Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. 2 94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have Anchorage trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short 1. Look behind the seating position where you buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert plan to install the child restraint to find the the latch plate into the buckle with the release button tether anchorage. You may need to move the facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4 seat forward to provide better access to the to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for restraint. that seating position (see the charts above), move the If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn available. the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate 2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint installation tight, try a different seating position. restraint. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95 3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint. 2 Tether Strap Mounting 1 — Cover 3 — Attaching Strap A — Tether Strap Hook B — Tether Anchor 4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram. 96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. restraint manufacturer’s instructions. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detriTransporting Pets mental and should be avoided. Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in changes should be consistent with anticipated climate a collision. conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts. “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break-in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle. Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. CAUTION! Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97 NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty. SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA. WARNING! • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Exhaust Gas WARNING! Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can (Continued) 2 98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area. • If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. system. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99 Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition, replace the belt. feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable. 2 Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they The light should come on and remain on for cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your authorized WARNING! dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious perdealer. sonal injury. Defroster • Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners. Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to Air Bag Warning Light (Continued) 100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle. • Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats. Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals. • Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning. • Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control. • If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory. Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle. (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Door Latches Tires Fluid Leaks Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure. Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately. Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel. Check for positive closing, latching, and locking. 2 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 ▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 ▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 ▫ Uconnect威 Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 ▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .108 ▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .129 ▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 ▫ Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect威 Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 ▫ Adjusting Side View Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 ▫ Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . .110 ▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .111 ▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .111 䡵 Uconnect威 Phone — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .111 ▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 䡵 VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .142 ▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . .142 ▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 ▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 3 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 ▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 ▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 ▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 ▫ Headlights And Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .165 ▫ Manual Front Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . .153 ▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .165 ▫ Driver Seat Manual Height Adjuster — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 ▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 ▫ Reclining Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 ▫ Lumbar Support — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .155 ▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 ▫ Fold-Flat Passenger Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 ▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 ▫ Folding Rear Seat Center Armrest . . . . . . . . .161 䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .162 ▫ Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 ▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 ▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 ▫ High/Low Beam Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 ▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 ▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 ▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . .168 ▫ Instrument Panel Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 ▫ Map/Reading/Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .169 ▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 ▫ Battery Saver Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .171 ▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 ▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED. . . .179 ▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 ▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink威. . .181 ▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 ▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 ▫ Headlights With Wipers Feature (Available With Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 ▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .184 䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .175 䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 ▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 ▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 ▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 ▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .185 ▫ Using HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 ▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 ▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 ▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .189 3 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190 䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 ▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .190 ▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 ▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190 ▫ Rear Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 ▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .190 䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 ▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190 ▫ Glovebox Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . .198 ▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 䡵 CONSOLE FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 ▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 ▫ Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 ▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192 ▫ Ski Pass-Through. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 ▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192 䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .192 䡵 CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 ▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 MIRRORS Inside Day/Night Mirror A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical mirror adjustment. Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window. 3 Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the windshield). Adjusting Rearview Mirror 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right of the button does not illuminate. NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse. Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION! To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Power Mirrors The power mirror control is located on the driver’s door trim panel. 3 Mirror Directions Power Mirror Control To adjust a mirror, turn the control wand toward the left or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the control wand in the direction you want the mirror to move. When you are finished adjusting the mirror, turn the control to the center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror. 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Adjusting Side View Mirrors WARNING! (Continued) Outside Mirror — Driver Side Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of traffic, with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror. Outside Mirror — Passenger Side collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror. Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side mirror. Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the All exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved either vehicle. forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have three detent positions: full forward, full rearward and WARNING! normal. Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to (Continued) UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Heated Mirrors — If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. 3 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use the mirror, lower the sun visor and rotate the mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights. Illuminated Vanity Mirror Uconnect姞 Phone — IF EQUIPPED Uconnect威 Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle communications system. Uconnect威 Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ “Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE through your vehicle’s audio system; the system will auto- without wires or a docking station, so Uconnect威 Phone matically mute your radio when using the Uconnect威 works no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone Phone. is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s NOTE: The Uconnect威 Phone requires a mobile phone Uconnect威 Phone. The Uconnect威 Phone allows up to equipped with the Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile”, Verseven mobile phones to be linked to the system. Only one sion 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect威 website for suplinked (or paired) mobile phone can be used with the ported phones. system at a time. The system is available in English, For Uconnect威 customer support, visit Spanish, or French languages. www.UconnectPhone.com or call 1–877–855–8400. Uconnect威 Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone for private conversation. The Uconnect威 Phone is driven through your Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect威 features Bluetooth威 technology - the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other WARNING! Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 The Uconnect威 Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect威 Phone The radio or steering wheel controls (if can be adjusted either from the radio volume control equipped) will contain the two control buttons knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right button and Voice Com(Uconnect威 Phone switch), if so equipped. mand button) that will enable you to access the system. When you press the button you will The radio display will be used for visual prompts from hear the word Uconnect威 followed by a BEEP. The beep the Uconnect威 Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on certain radios. is your signal to give a command. Uconnect威 Phone Button Voice Command Button Operation Actual button location may vary with the ra- Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect威 dio. The individual buttons are described in the Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect威 Phone menu structure. Voice commands are required after most “Operation” section. Uconnect威 Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a The Uconnect威 Phone can be used with any Hands-Free specific command and then guided through the available Profile certified Bluetooth威 mobile phone. See the options. Uconnect威 website for supported phones. Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for details. 3 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the Voice Command Tree beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or another Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section. prompt. Help Command • For certain operations, compound commands can be used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to “Pair a Device”, the following compound command know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following the beep. The Uconnect威 Phone will play some of the can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth威 Device”. options at any prompt if you ask for help. • For each feature explanation in this section, only the compound form of the voice command is given. You To activate the Uconnect威 Phone, simply press the button and follow the audible prompts for directions. can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it. For Uconnect威 Phone sessions begin with a press of the button on the radio control head. example, you can use the compound form voice command “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can break the Cancel Command compound form command into two voice commands: “Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please remember, the At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and Uconnect威 Phone works best when you talk in a you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu. sitting a few feet/meters away from you. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Pair (Link) Uconnect威 Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect威 Phone, you must pair your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled mobile phone. To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The Uconnect威 website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing. The following are general phone to Uconnect威 Phone pairing instructions: • Press the button to begin. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “Device Pairing”. • When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device” and follow the audible prompts. • You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN), which you will later need to enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process. • For identification purposes, you will be prompted to give the Uconnect威 Phone a name for your mobile phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name. • You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a priority level between one and seven, with one being the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile phones to your Uconnect威 Phone. However, at any given time, only one mobile phone can be in use, connected to your Uconnect威 System. The priority allows the Uconnect威 Phone to know which mobile phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the Uconnect威 Phone will use the priority three mobile 3 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE phone when you make a call. You can select to use a • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “Call”. lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to “Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section). • The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call. Dial By Saying A Number • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say the name of the person you want to call. For example, • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say you can say “John Doe”, where John Doe is a previ“Dial”. ously stored name entry in the Uconnect威 phonebook or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a • The system will prompt you to say the number you name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your want to call. Uconnect威 Phonebook”, in the phonebook. • For example, you can say “234-567-8901”. • The Uconnect威 system will confirm the name and then • The Uconnect威 Phone will confirm the phone number dial the corresponding phone number, which may and then dial. The number will appear in the display appear in the display of certain radios. of certain radios. Add Names To Your Uconnect威 Phonebook Call By Saying A Name NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect威 Phonebook is • Press the button to begin. recommended when the vehicle is not in motion. • Press the button to begin. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 • Press the button to begin. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “Phonebook New Entry”. • When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of long names helps the Voice Command and it is recommended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert” instead of “Bob”. • When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g., “Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”). This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry, if desired. The Uconnect威 Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations. Each language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that language. In addition, if equipped and supported by your phone, Uconnect威 Phone automatically downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook. Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone, Uconnect威 Phone automatically downloads names (text names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s • When prompted, recite the phone number for the phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect威 phonebook entry that you are adding. website for supported phones. After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more • To call a name from the Uconnect威 Phonebook or downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the by Saying a Name” section. main menu. 3 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • Automatic download and update, if supported, begins • This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is deleted on the Uconnect威 Phone. These can only be edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transmade to the Uconnect威 Phone, for example, after you ferred and updated to Uconnect威 Phone on the next start the vehicle. phone connection. • A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected Edit Uconnect威 Phonebook Entries to the Uconnect威 Phone. NOTE: • Depending on the maximum number of entries down• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest when the vehicle is not in motion. downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail- • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited. able for use. • Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile • phone is accessible. • • Either the mobile phone’s phonebook or the mobile phone’s SIM card phonebook is downloaded. • Press the button to begin. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “Phonebook Edit Entry”. You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 • Next, choose the number designation (home, work, • mobile, or other) that you wish to edit. • • When prompted, recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing. • After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return to the main menu. Press the button to begin. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “Phonebook Delete”. After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose. To select one of the entries from the list, press the button while the Uconnect威 Phone is playing the desired entry and say “Delete”. “Phonebook Edit Entry” can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number, but you can add “John • After you enter the name, the Uconnect威 Phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete: home, Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you Entry” feature. wish to delete. Delete Uconnect威 Phonebook Entry • Note that only the phonebook entry in the current NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended language is deleted. when the vehicle is not in motion. 3 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be List All Names In The Uconnect威 Phonebook deleted or edited. • Press the button to begin. Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect威 Phonebook Entries • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • Press the button to begin. “Phonebook List Names”. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • The Uconnect威 Phone will play the names of all the “Phonebook Erase All”. phonebook entries, including the downloaded phonebook entries, if available. • The Uconnect威 Phone will ask you to verify that you butwish to delete all the entries from the phonebook. • To call one of the names in the list, press the ton during the playing of the desired name, and say • After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be “Call”. deleted. NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete” • Note that only the phonebook in the current language operations at this point. is deleted. • The Uconnect威 Phone will then prompt you as to the • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be number designation you wish to call. deleted or edited. • The selected number will be dialed. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call The following features can be accessed through the Currently In Progress Uconnect威 Phone if the feature(s) are available on your If a call is currently in progress and you have another mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be call waiting that you normally hear when using your button to place the current accessed through the Uconnect威 Phone. Check with your mobile phone. Press the call on hold and answer the incoming call. mobile service provider for the features that you have. Phone Call Features NOTE: The Uconnect威 Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can Uconnect威 Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system, only answer an incoming call or ignore it. if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the call. Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In button to accept the call. To reject the call, Progress Press the button until you hear a single beep, press and hold the To make a second call while you are currently on a call, indicating that the incoming call was rejected. press the button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call Currently In Progress 3 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling Conference Call Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer When two calls are in progress (one active and one on to “Conference Call” in this section. button until you hear a hold), press and hold the double beep indicating that the two calls have been Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold joined into one conference call. To put a call on hold, press the button until you hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To Three-Way Calling but- To initiate three-way calling, press the bring the call back from hold, press and hold the button while ton until you hear a single beep. a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as described under “Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress”. After the second call has established, If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), button until you hear a double press and hold the press the button until you hear a single beep, indicatbeep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into ing that the active and hold status of the two calls have one conference call. switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time. Toggling Between Calls UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Call Termination To end a call in progress, momentarily press the button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. If the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press button until you hear a single beep. and hold the Redial NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the Uconnect威 Phone. Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect威 Phone after the vehicle ignition has been switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types: • After the ignition is switched to OFF, a call can continue on the Uconnect威 Phone either until the call ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say cessation of the call on the Uconnect威 Phone and “Redial”. transfer of the call to the mobile phone. • The Uconnect威 Phone will call the last number that • After the ignition is cycled to OFF, a call can continue was dialed from your mobile phone. on the Uconnect威 Phone for a certain duration, after which the call is automatically transferred from the Uconnect威 Phone to the mobile phone. • Press the button to begin. 3 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • An active call is automatically transferred to the mo- NOTE: After every Uconnect威 Phone language change operation, only the language-specific 32-name phonebile phone after the ignition is cycled to OFF. book is usable. The paired phone name is not languageUconnect姞 Phone Features specific and is usable across all languages. Language Selection Emergency Assistance To change the language that the Uconnect威 Phone is If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is using: reachable: button to begin. • Press the • Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say number for your area. the name of the language you wish to switch to If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect威 Phone is English, Espanol, or Francais. operational, you may reach the emergency number as • Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the follows: language selection. button to begin. • Press the After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say voice commands will be in that language. “Emergency” and the Uconnect威 Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and Mexico. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 NOTE: • The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and area. WARNING! To use you Uconnect威 Phone System in an emergency, your mobile phone must be: • turned on, • paired to the Uconnect威 System, • and have network coverage. • If supported, this number may be programmable on button and say Roadside Assistance some systems. To do this, press the “Setup”, followed by “Emergency”. If you need roadside assistance: • The Uconnect威 Phone does slightly lower your • Press the button to begin. chances of successfully making a phone call as to that • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say for the mobile phone directly. “Roadside Assistance”. 3 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: Voice Mail Calling • The roadside assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-5282069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-143454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the “Roadside Assistance” coverage details on the DVD in the Warranty Information Booklet and the Roadside Assistance references. To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working with Automated Systems”. Working With Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system. You can use your Uconnect威 Phone to access a voice mail • If supported, this number may be programmable on system or an automated service, such as a paging service button and say or automated customer service line. Some services resome systems. To do this, press the quire immediate response selection. In some instances, “Setup”, followed by “Roadside Assistance”. that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect威 Phone. Paging When calling a number with your Uconnect威 Phone that To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence Systems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the certain companies, which time out a little too soon to button and say the sequence you wish to enter, work properly with the Uconnect威 Phone. followed by the word “Send”. For example, if required to UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you • Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the button and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send”. can press the use of this feature. Saying a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by “Send”, is also to be used for navigating through an Barge In — Overriding Prompts automated customer service center menu structure, and The “Voice Command” button can be used when you to leave a number on a pager. wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice You can also send stored Uconnect威 phonebook entries as command immediately. For example, if a prompt is tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to could press the button and say, “Pair a Phone” to button and say, “Send.” The call and then press the select that option without having to listen to the rest of system will prompt you to enter the name or number and the voice prompt. say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send. The Uconnect威 Phone will then send the corresponding Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system tones over the phone. from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect威 Phone NOTE: will not repeat a phone number before you dial it). • You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone • Press the network configurations. This is normal. button to begin. 3 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 mobile phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s one of the following: audio system. The Uconnect威 Phone will work the same – “Setup Confirmation Prompts On” as if you dial the number using Voice Command. – “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off” NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the Phone And Network Status Indicators dial ring to the Uconnect威 Phone to play it on the vehicle If available on the radio and/or on a premium display audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situasuch as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel your mobile phone, the Uconnect威 Phone will provide that the call did not go through even though the call is in notification to inform you of your phone and network progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the status when you are attempting to make a phone call audio. using Uconnect威 Phone. The status is given for network Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF) signal strength, phone battery strength, etc. When you mute the Uconnect威 Phone, you will still be Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad able to hear the conversation coming from the other You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In keypad and still use the Uconnect威 Phone (while dialing order to mute the Uconnect威 Phone: via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise • Press the button. caution and take precautionary safety measures). By UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 • Following the beep, say “Mute”. In order to un-mute the Uconnect威 Phone: • Press the button. • Following the beep, say “Mute off”. Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect威 Phone And Mobile Phone Your mobile phone can be paired with many different electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected” with one electronic device at a time. If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威 connection between your mobile phone and the Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone Uconnect威 Phone System, follow the instructions deThe Uconnect威 Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans- scribed in your mobile phone User’s Manual. ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect威 Phone List Paired Mobile Phone Names without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call button to begin. from your Uconnect威 Phone paired mobile phone to the • Press the button and Uconnect威 Phone or vice versa, press the • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say say “Transfer Call”. “Setup Phone Pairing”. Advanced Phone Connectivity • When prompted, say “List Phones”. 3 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • The Uconnect威 Phone will play the phone names of all • The selected phone will be used for the next phone call. If the selected phone is not available, the paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the Uconnect威 Phone will return to using the highest lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone priority phone present in or near (approximately button and say “Sebeing announced, press the within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle. lect” or “Delete”. Also, see the next two sections for an alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone. Delete Uconnect威 Phone Paired Mobile Phones Select Another Mobile Phone • Press the button to begin. This feature allows you to select and start using another • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say phone paired with the Uconnect威 Phone. “Setup Phone Pairing”. button to begin. • Press the • At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say prompts. “Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts. button at any time while the • You can also press the button at any time while the • You can also press the list is being played, and then choose the phone you list is being played, and then choose the phone that wish to delete. you wish to select. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect姞 Phone Uconnect威 Phone Tutorial • Press the button and say the “Voice Training”, “System Training”, or “Start Voice Training” command. To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the You can either press the Uconnect威 Phone button to restore the factory setting or repeat the words and button and say “Uconnect威 Tutorial.” phrases when prompted by the Uconnect威 Phone. For Voice Training best results, the Voice Training session should be comFor users experiencing difficulty with the system recog- pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine nizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect威 running, all windows closed, and the blower fan Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this switched off. training mode, follow one of the two following proce- This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The dures: system will adapt to the last trained voice only. From outside the Uconnect威 Phone mode (e.g., from Reset radio mode): • Press the button. button for five seconds until • Press and hold the • After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say the session begins, or, “Setup”, then “Reset”. 3 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries, and other settings in all language modes. The System will prompt you before resetting to factory settings. Voice Command • low road noise, • smooth road surface, • fully closed windows, • dry weather condition. • For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to • Even though the system is designed for users speaking provide at least ½ in (1 cm) gap between the overhead in North American English, French, and Spanish acconsole (if equipped) and the mirror. cents, the system may not always work for some. • Always wait for the beep before speaking. • When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of • Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”. speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from you. • Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended. • Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period. • It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the Uconnect威 Phonebook. • Performance is maximized under: • low-to-medium blower setting, • low-to-medium vehicle speed, UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 • Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect威 Phone Local) name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar. • Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”. • You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero). • smooth road surface, • fully closed windows, • dry weather conditions, and • operation from the driver’s seat. • Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not the Uconnect威 Phone. • Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing • Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume. number combinations may not be supported. • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down. compromised with the convertible top down. Far End Audio Performance Recent Calls • Audio quality is maximized under: • low-to-medium blower setting, • low-to-medium vehicle speed, • low road noise, If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Download”, Uconnect威 Phone can list your Outgoing, Incoming and Missed Calls. 3 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE SMS Send Messages: Uconnect威 Phone can read or send new messages on You can send messages using Uconnect威 Phone. To send your phone. a new message: Read Messages: • Press the button. If you receive a new text message while your phone is • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say connected to Uconnect威 Phone, an announcement will be “SMS Send” or “Send Message.” made to notify you that you have a new text message. If • You can either say the message you wish to send or say you wish to hear the new message: “List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages. button. • Press the button while the To send a message, press the • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say system is listing the message and say “Send.” “SMS Read” or “Read Messages.” Uconnect威 Phone will prompt you to say the name or • Uconnect威 Phone will play the new text message for number of the person you wish to send the message to. you. List of Preset Messages: After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward” 1. Yes the message using Uconnect威 Phone. 2. No UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 3. Where are you? 16. Can this wait? 4. I need more direction. 17. Bye for now 5. L O L 18. When can we meet? 6. Why 19. Send number to call 7. I love you 20. Start without me 8. Call me Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF 9. Call me later Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop the system from announcing the new incoming messages. 10. Thanks 11. See You in 15 minutes • Press the 12. I am on my way • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you will then be given a choice to change it. 13. I’ll be late 14. Are you there yet? 15. Where are we meeting? button. 3 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Bluetooth威 Communication Link Power-Up Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect威 Phone. When this happens, the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth威 ON mode. After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the system. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 3 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 3 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Commands Primary Alternate (s) zero one two three four five six seven eight nine star (*) plus (+) pound (#) add location Voice Commands Primary Alternate (s) all call cancel confirmation prompts continue delete dial download edit emergency English erase all Espanol Francais UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 Voice Commands Primary Alternate (s) help home language list names list phones mobile mute mute off new entry no other pair a phone phone pairing pairing phonebook phone book Voice Commands Primary Alternate (s) previous record again redial return to main menu return or main menu select phone select send set up phone settings or phone set up towing assistance transfer call Uconnect威 Tutorial voice training work yes 3 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE General Information VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and Voice Command System Operation RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions: The Uconnect威 Voice Command system allows you to control your AM, FM radio, disk player, • Changes or modifications not expressly approved by USB mass storage class device, iPOD family of the party responsible for compliance could void the devices, Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device, user’s authority to operate the equipment. satellite radio, disc player, and a memo recorder. • This device may not cause harmful interference. NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface Sys• This device must accept any interference received, tem as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the including interference that may cause undesired opVoice Interface System to recognize user voice commands eration. may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 WARNING! Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable laws. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death. Pressing the Voice Command button while the system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or change commands. This will become helpful once you start to learn the options. NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”, “Help” or “Main Menu”. button, you These commands are universal and can be used from any When you press the Voice Command will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a menu. All other commands can be used depending upon command. the active application. NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few When using this system, you should speak clearly and at seconds, the system will present you with a list of a normal speaking volume. options. The system will best recognize your speech if the winIf you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is button, listen for set to low. options, press the Voice Command the beep, and say your command. At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your commands, you will be prompted to repeat it. 3 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Com- Main Menu button and say “Help” or “Main Menu”. mand Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the Commands main menu. The Voice Command system understands two types of commands. Universal commands are available at all In this mode, you can say the following commands: times. Local commands are available if the supported • “Radio AM” (to switch to the radio AM mode) radio mode is active. • “Radio FM” (to switch to radio FM mode) Changing the Volume • “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode) 1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command button. • “USB” (to switch to USB mode) 2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”). • “Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to Bluetooth威 Streaming mode) 3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com- • “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder) mand system is speaking. Please note the volume • “System Setup” (to switch to system setup) setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 Radio AM • “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu) To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) this mode, you may say the following commands: Satellite Radio • “Frequency #” (to change the frequency) To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com• “Next Station” (to select the next station) mands: • “Previous Station” (to select the previous station) • “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its • “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu) spoken number) • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) • “Next Channel” (to select the next channel) Radio FM • “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel) To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In • “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels) this mode, you may say the following commands: • “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel) • “Frequency #” (to change the frequency) • “Next Station” (to select the next station) • “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu) • “Previous Station” (to select the previous station) • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) 3 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Disc Mode Bluetooth威 Streaming (BT) Mode To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you To switch to Bluetooth威 Streaming (BT) mode, say may say the following commands: “Bluetooth Streaming”. In this mode, you may say the following commands: • “Track” (#) (to change the track) • “Next Track” (to play the next track) • “Next Track” (to play the next track) • “Previous Track” (to play the previous track) • “Previous Track” (to play the previous track) • “List” (to list a Artist, Playlist, Album, Track, etc.) • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) Memo Mode USB Mode To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In To switch to USB mode, say “USB”. In this mode, you this mode, you may say the following commands: may say the following commands: • “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the • “Next Track” (to play the next track) recording, you may press the Voice Command button to stop recording. You proceed by saying • “Previous Track” (to play the previous track) one of the following commands: • “Play” (to play a Artist Name, Playlist Name, Album – “Save” (to save the memo) Name, Track Name, etc.) – “Continue” (to continue recording) UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 – “Delete” (to delete the recording) • “Main menu setup” or • “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) — During the playback you may press the Voice Combutton to stop playing memos. You promand ceed by saying one of the following commands: – “Repeat” (to repeat a memo) – “Next” (to play the next memo) – “Previous” (to play the previous memo) – “Delete” (to delete a memo) • “Switch to setup” • “Delete All” (to delete all memos) • “Voice Training” In this mode, you may say the following commands: • “Language English” • “Language French” • “Language Spanish” • “Tutorial” NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice button first and wait for the beep before Command To switch to system setup, you may say one of the speaking the “Barge In” commands. following: Setup • “Change to setup” • “Switch to system setup” • “Change to setup” 3 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Training SEATS For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog- Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect威 vehicle. Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used. button, say “System 1. Press the Voice Command Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice Training.” This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition. 2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by Uconnect威 Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training” session should be completed when the vehicle is parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only. WARNING! • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 Power Seats — If Equipped The power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor. Use the bottom switch to move the seat up, down, forward, rearward, or to tilt the seat. The top switch controls the seatback recliner. Power Seat Switches WARNING! • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death. • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. • Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. 3 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path. Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached. Reclining The Seatback The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward, Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch the switch when the desired position is reached. when the desired position has been reached. Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 WARNING! CAUTION! • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death. • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. • Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path. Heated Seats — If Equipped There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver and passenger to operate the seats independently. The controls for each heater are located on the center of the instrument panel (above the climate controls). 3 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings. to one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes. heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF. WARNING! Press the switch once to select HIGH-level heating. Press the switch a second time to select LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF. NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes. When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. • Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rearThe manual seat adjustment bar is at the front of the seat, ward. Release the bar once the seat is in the position desired. Then, using body pressure, move forward and near the floor. rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched. Manual Front Seat Adjustment WARNING! Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked. Manual Seat Adjusting Bar 3 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Driver Seat Manual Height Adjuster — If Equipped Reclining Seats The recline lever is located on the side of the seat. To A lever style height adjustment feature enhances comfort recline, lean forward slightly before lifting the lever, then for petite as well as tall drivers. A lever with a ratcheting lean back to the desired position and release the lever. mechanism, located on the outboard side of the seat, Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its normal position. raises and lowers it. Total travel is 2.2 in (56 mm). Seat Height Adjustment Lever Recline Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 WARNING! • Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked. • Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked. 3 Lumbar Support Lever Lumbar Support — If Equipped Head Restraints This feature allows you to increase or decrease the amount of lumbar support. The control lever is located on the outboard side of the driver’s seatback. Turn the control lever downward to increase and upward to decrease the desired amount of lumbar support. Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision. When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR. This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push Active Head Restraints — Front Seats button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable compo- downward on the head restraint. nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and trim, the back half being decorative plastic. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 3 Push Button For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head. Active Head Restraint (Normal Position) 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. WARNING! Active Head Restraint (Tilted) NOTE: • The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer. • Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death. (Continued) UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 WARNING! (Continued) • Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed. Fold-Flat Passenger Seatback The recline handle on the front passenger seat also releases the seatback to fold forward. 3 Head Restraints — Rear Seats The rear seat head restraints are fixed and cannot be adjusted. For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. Recline Lever 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The hard seatback features a work surface and a molded rim for retaining items stored on the seatback panel. Rear Seat Release Loops Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat Folding Rear Seat To provide additional storage area, the rear seatback can be folded forward. Pull on the loops to fold down either or both seatbacks. When returning the rear seatback to the upright position, be sure the seatback is latched. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 WARNING! The rear cargo area of the vehicle (with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position) should not be used as a play area by children. They could be seriously injured in a collision. Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system. 3 Folding Rear Seat Center Armrest The rear seat is equipped with a folding armrest with cupholders. Folding Rear Seat Armrest 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open the hood, two latches must be released. 2. Then lift the secondary latch located under the front edge of the hood, near the center and raise the hood. 1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel. Hood Safety Latch Location Hood Release Lever Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open position. Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole on the left underside of the hood. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 CAUTION! To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Use a firm downward push at the center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage. 3 WARNING! Prop Rod Location NOTE: Before closing the hood, make sure to stow the prop rod in its proper location. Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death. 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE LIGHTS Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the parking lights, headlights, headlight beam selection, passing light, fog lights, instrument panel light dimming and turn signals. The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column. Multifunction Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 Headlights And Parking Lights Automatic Headlights — If Equipped Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent Turning the end of the multifunction lever to the third for parking light operation. Turn to the second detent for detent (AUTO), will activate the automatic headlight headlight operation. system. 3 Headlight Switch Headlight Switch 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE With the engine running and the multifunction lever in Turn Signals the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on and turn Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows off based on the surrounding light levels. on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. Headlight Time Delay There is also a feature that delays turning off the vehicle lights for 30, 60 or 90 seconds after the ignition switch is turned OFF. To activate the headlight delay, the multifunction lever must be rotated to the off position after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Only the headlights will illuminate during this time. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver’s door is opened. Turn Signal Control UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective. Lane Change Assist Flash-To-Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released. NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-toTap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond pass position for more than 15 seconds, the high beams the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash will shut off. If this occurs, wait 30 seconds for the next three times then automatically turn off. flash-to-pass operation. High/Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you, to switch the headlights back to low beam. 3 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Fog Lights — If Equipped NOTE: The front fog lights will only operate with the headlights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the front fog lights. The front fog light switch is on the multifunction lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn on the Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull out The front turn signal lamps will turn on as Daytime the end of the multifunction lever. Running Lights whenever the ignition is ON, the engine is running, the headlight switch is off, the parking brake is released and the shift lever is in any position except PARK. NOTE: The Daytime Running Lights will flash when a turn signal is in operation and return to DRL mode when the turn signal is not operating. Front Fog Light Operation UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 Instrument Panel Dimmer Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is opened. 3 Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights when the parking lights or headlights are on. Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on. Dimmer Control Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last Map/Reading/Interior Lights detent to turn on the interior lighting. These lights are mounted between the sun visors above the rearview mirror. Each light can be turned on by pressing the barrel. Press the barrel a second time to turn the light off. Both of these lights can swivel so that the light can be aimed at a specific spot, if desired. The lights 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time, so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle. They will not turn off automatically. Interior lighting also comes on when a door is opened or the dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the second detent. There is a second light located midway back in the headliner. To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open. To restore interior light operation, either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch. Battery Saver Feature To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open. Map/Reading Lights UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 Rotate the end of the lever to the LO position for low-speed wiper operation, or to the HI position for The wipers and washers are operated by a switch high-speed wiper operation. on the control lever. The lever is located on the right side of the steering column. WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Changing Wiper Speeds Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever 3 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: The wipers will automatically return to the park position if you turn the ignition switch OFF while they are operating. The wipers will resume operation when you turn the ignition switch to the ON position again. CAUTION! cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the windshield wiper/ washer control lever to the first detent, and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There are five delay settings, which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles. • Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off. • Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position. If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage to the wiper motor may occur. Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper system when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between Changing Intermittent Settings UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed. If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay times will be doubled. Windshield Washers To use the washer, pull the windshield wiper/washer control lever toward you and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired. WARNING! Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with defroster before and during windshield washer use. If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in Mist Feature the delay range, the wipers will operate in low-speed for two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume Push down on the wiper control lever to activate a single wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from the intermittent interval previously selected. a passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held down, the If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in wipers will continue to operate. the off position, the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles and then turn off. 3 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid. Headlights With Wipers Feature (Available With Automatic Headlights Only) When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the multifunction lever (on the left side of the steering column) is placed in the AUTO position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature. The headlights with wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Mist Control UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column. To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in position, pull the lever upward until fully engaged. WARNING! Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death. Tilt/Telescoping Lever 3 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h). The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel. Electronic Speed Control Buttons 1 — ON/OFF 4 — CANCEL 2 — RES + 3 — SET - UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed. WARNING! Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it. To Activate To Set A Desired Speed Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be turned off when not in use. Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button. 3 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h). button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released. Release the button speed memory. when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed To Resume Speed will be established. To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph button and release. Resume can be used at any speed (1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of above 20 mph (32 km/h). the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h). To Vary The Speed Setting To Accelerate For Passing When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can inPress the accelerator as you would normally. When the crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established. To Deactivate UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the HomeLink威 replaces up to three hand-held transmitters vehicle set speed. that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains HomeLink威 unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on battery. moderate hills is normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control. WARNING! Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery. 3 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The HomeLink威 buttons, located on either the overhead console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink威 channels.The HomeLink威 indicator is located above the center button. HomeLink威 Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active. HomeLink威 Buttons/Overhead Consoles UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 Before You Begin Programming HomeLink姞 NOTE: Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage • Erasing all channels should only be performed when before you begin programming. programming HomeLink威 for the first time. Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons. For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that • If you have any problems, or require assistance, please a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink威 www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance. system. Erase all channels before you begin programming. To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink威 buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red indicator flashes. 3 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Programming A Rolling Code For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer. Training The Garage Door Opener 1 — Door Opener 2 — Training Button UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in view. 3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink威 button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button. 5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode. NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi- step after the LEARN button has been pressed. cator light. The Homelink威 indicator will flash slowly 6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed and then rapidly after Homelink威 has received the HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Reseconds each time). If the garage door opener/device lease both buttons after the indicator light changes activates, programming is complete. from slow to rapid. NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete the training. 3 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons, Programming A Non-Rolling Code repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured erase the channels. before 1995. Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away follow these steps: from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in view. 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until 3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink威 button you want to program and the hand-held transthe indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do mitter button. not release the button. 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The Homelink威 indicator will flash slowly ming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining and then rapidly after HomeLink威 has received the steps. frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink威 button and observe the indicator light. • If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink威 button is pressed. • To program the two remaining HomeLink威 buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels. 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Non-Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining steps. Canadian/Gate Operator Programming For programming transmitters in Canada/United States that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after several seconds of transmission. Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transTo reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink威 follow these steps: to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. time-out in the same manner. 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do process to prevent possible overheating of the garage not release the button. door or gate motor. Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. 3 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in view. • To program the two remaining HomeLink威 buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels. 3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button, while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威 has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained. If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for programming, plug it back in at this time. Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps: 4. Watch for the HomeLink威 indicator to change flash 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do door may open and close while you are programming. not release the button. 5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink威 button 3. Without releasing the button proceed with and observe the indicator light. “Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and • If the indicator light stays on constantly, programfollow all remaining steps. ming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink威 button is pressed. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 Using HomeLink姞 Troubleshooting Tips To operate, press and release the programmed HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time. If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here are some of the most common solutions: Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle. • Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter. • Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code. • Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in? If you have any problems, or require assistance, please To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance. channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased. The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active. 3 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance. • Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death. General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: • The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the device. • The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED The sunroof controls are mounted between the dome/ reading lights. Power Sunroof Switch WARNING! • Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch (or with the ignition in the Accessory or Run position, for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™). Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. • In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured. • Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result. 3 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop second and the sunroof will open automatically from any the sunroof. position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the will stop the sunroof. forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward closed condition until the switch is pushed and held to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the forward again. Opening Sunroof — Express movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially Pinch Protect Feature opened condition until the switch is pushed and held This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of rearward again. the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obClosing Sunroof — Express struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the Press the switch forward and release it within one-half sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstrucsecond and the sunroof will close automatically from any tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and release to Express Close. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled. Venting Sunroof — Express Press and release the Vent button within one half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof. Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open. Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window. 3 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sunroof Maintenance ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) electrical power outlets on this vehicle. Both of the power outlets are protected by a the glass panel. fuse. Ignition Off Operation The instrument panel power outlet, located below the For Vehicles Not Equipped With The Electronic Vehicle climate control knobs, has power available only when the Information Center (EVIC) ignition is ON. This power outlet will also operate a The power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 conventional cigar lighter unit. seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. For Vehicles Equipped With The EVIC The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 3 Instrument Panel Power Outlet Center Console Power Outlet NOTE: To preserve the heating element, do not hold the The center console power outlet is powered directly from lighter in the heating position. the battery (power available at all times). Items plugged into this power outlet may discharge the battery and/or A second power outlet is located inside the center conprevent the engine from starting. sole. 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威 knob and element must be used. CAUTION! • Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced. • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Power Outlet Fuse Locations 1 — #16 Fuse 15 A Blue Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel 2 — #11 Fuse 15 A Blue Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 WARNING! CAUTION! To avoid serious injury or death: • Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet. • Do not touch with wet hands. • Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle. • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure. • Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. • Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution. • After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery. 3 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF EQUIPPED An optional ash receiver is available from your authorized dealer and will fit in the center console front cupholder. The optional ash receiver also comes with a cigar lighter that can be used with the power outlets. Refer to “Power Outlets” in “Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle” for further information. CUPHOLDERS Front Cupholders Front Seat Cupholders Rear Cupholders The cupholders in the center console will accommodate either two large size cups or two 20 oz (.5 L) bottles or The rear seat cupholders are located in the armrest cans. The one-peice insert can be easily removed for between the rear seats. Pull down the armrest to use the cleaning. An optional removable ashtray may be located cupholders. in one of the cupholders. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 3 Rear Cupholders Rear Seat Bottle Holder There are built-in bottle holders located in both rear door trim panels. Rear Bottle Holder WARNING! If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burning the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors to avoid injury. 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE STORAGE Glovebox Storage Compartment The glovebox storage compartment is located on the right side of the instrument panel. To open the glovebox, pull outward on the latch handle located on the front of the glovebox. Glovebox Storage Compartment CONSOLE FEATURES Storage The center console is located between the front driver and passenger seats. The center console armrest slides forward from design position to provide added user UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 comfort. The center console can be used for storage and is also equipped with an electrical power outlet. Refer to “Power Outlets” in “Understanding The Feature of Your Vehicle” for further information. 3 Center Console Storage The top compartment holds small items, such as a pen and note pad, while the larger bottom compartment will hold CDs and alike. The bottom compartment also contains a 12 Volt power outlet. The console’s front opening Center Console Armrest Two separate storage compartments are also located lid allows for easy access to these compartments. underneath the armrest. 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: CARGO AREA FEATURES • A notch in the front of the console base allows for use The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying of a cellular phone while it is plugged into the power versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When outlet with the armrest latched down. the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous, • The power outlet can also energize the cigar lighter in nearly flat extension of the load floor. the optional cup holder ash receiver. When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the WARNING! seatback above the seat strap. Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music WARNING! players, and other handheld electronic devices • Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices position. If the seatback in not securely locked into while driving can cause an accident due to distracposition, the seat will not provide the proper station, resulting in death or injury. bility for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury. (Continued) UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 WARNING! (Continued) • The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position) should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously injured in a collision. Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system. • To help protect against personal injury, passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and use seat belts. • The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle: Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible. Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision. 3 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Ski Pass-Through REAR WINDOW FEATURES There is a ski pass-through door located behind the rear Rear Window Defroster seat armrest that allows longer items, such as snow skis, to be stored in the rear cargo area. Lower the armrest and The rear window defroster button is located on pull downward on the latch to open the ski pass-through the climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button door. to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, press the button a second time. NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating. Ski Pass-Through UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 CAUTION! Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: • Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. 3 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS 䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES. . . . . . . . . . .208 ▫ EVIC Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 ▫ Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .210 ▫ Average Fuel Economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 䡵 MINI-TRIP COMPUTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . .223 ▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 ▫ Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 ▫ Tire PSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 ▫ Elapsed Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 ▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 ▫ Oil Change Required — If Equipped . . . . . . .228 ▫ EVIC Units Selection (UNITS IN Display) . . . .234 ▫ System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 ▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 4 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 䡵 SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK . . . . . . . . . . .238 ▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . . .249 䡵 Uconnect威 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 ▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 ▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command System) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 ▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 ▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect威 Phone) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 䡵 UCONNECT威 130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239 ▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . . .249 ▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 ▫ Notes on Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 ▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . .247 䡵 UCONNECT威 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO . . .248 ▫ LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) . . . . . . .260 ▫ INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) . . . . . .260 ▫ Uconnect威 (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped. . . .261 䡵 iPod威/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . .265 ▫ Connecting The iPod威 Or External USB Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266 ▫ Using This Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 ▫ Controlling The iPod威 Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 ▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 ▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND PHONES . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . . . .271 䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . 䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 ▫ Manual Heating And Air ▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 ▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .274 MOBILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 Conditioning . . . . . .275 ▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 ▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 4 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 1 2 3 4 5 — Air Outlet — Side Window Demister Outlet — Instrument Cluster — Ignition Switch — Analog Clock 6 — Radio 7 — Passenger Airbag 8 — Glove Compartment 9 — Heated Seat Switch – If Equipped 10 — Hazard Switch 11 — Storage Compartment 12 — Climate Control 13 — Trunk Release Button 14 — Power Outlet UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 4 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature control to maximum heat, the Mode control to Floor and 1. Temperature Gauge the Fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera- as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat ture. Any reading below the red mark of the gauge shows from the engine cooling system. that the engine cooling system is operating properly. The 2. Fuel Door Reminder gauge pointer may show a higher than normal temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, in This is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is heavy stop and go traffic, or when towing a trailer. located on the left side of the vehicle. INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument cluster will sound a chime. Pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the H (red) mark, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. 3. Fuel Gauge When the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position, the pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. There are steps that you can take to slow down an 4. Speedometer impending overheat condition. If your air conditioning is Indicates the vehicle speed in miles per hour (MPH) and on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to kilometers per hour (km/h). the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 5. Low Fuel Light If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”. When the fuel level drops to approximately 2.0 gallons (7.6 Liters), the fuel symbol will light and 7. Air Bag Warning Light a single chime will sound. This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first NOTE: This light will remain on until a minimum of turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on approximately 3.0 gallons of fuel is added. during starting, stays on, or turns on while 6. Charging System Light driving, have the system inspected at an authorized This light shows the status of the electrical charg- dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” ing system. The light should come on briefly in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for when the ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly further information. as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while 8. Seat Belt Reminder Light driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s electrical devices, When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/ such as the Front Fog Lights or Rear Window Defroster. RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight If the Charging System Light remains on, it means that seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See your local the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver seat authorized dealer. belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Warning Light will 4 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL flash or remain on continuously. Refer to “Occupant 10. Engine Temperature Warning Light Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your This light warns of an overheated engine condiVehicle” for further information. tion. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the 9. Oil Pressure Warning Light gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to light will come on and remain on when the ignition pass H, and a continuous chime will occur until the switch is turned from the OFF to the ON/RUN position, engine is allowed to cool or the 4 minutes duration is and the light will turn off after the engine is started. If the expired, whichever come first. bulb does not come on during starting, have the system If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and checked by an authorized dealer. stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, If the light comes on and remains on while driving, stop shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vethe vehicle and shut off the engine. DO NOT OPERATE hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED. normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for The light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine. service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To This can be determined using the procedure shown in Do In Emergencies” for further information. “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 11. Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system. The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level. The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary. WARNING! Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. Vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock brakes (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi- the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and approximately three seconds. The light should then turn the brake fluid level checked. 4 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting from detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light PARK. inspected by an authorized dealer. 14. Odometer Display/Trip Odometer Display The light also will turn on when the parking brake is The odometer display shows the total distance the veapplied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posihicle has been driven. tion. U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair 12. Tachometer technician should leave the odometer reading the same The silver area of the scale shows the permissible engine as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so, revolutions-per-minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range. then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was prevent engine damage. before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to 13. Shift Lever Indicator make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/ service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the must be reset at zero. automatic transmission. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage. To switch from odometer to trip odometers, press and release the Trip Odometer button. To reset a trip odometer, display the desired trip odometer to be reset then push and hold the button until the display resets (approximately 2 seconds). Refer to “Trip Odometer Button” for additional information. gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap Fault HOTOIL . . . . . . . . . Engine Oil Temperature Exceeds Safe Threshold NOTE: If the instrument cluster is equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), then warnings such as ”Low Tire,” “Door Ajar” and “Trunk Vehicle Odometer Messages Ajar” will display in the EVIC. (Refer to “Electronic Vehicle When the appropriate conditions exist, the odometer will Information Center (EVIC)” for specific messages). display the following messages: LoW tirE door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Ajar When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three cycles. dECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trunk Ajar HOTOIL LoW tirE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pressure When this message is displayed there is a engine oil over-temperature condition. When this condition occurs, CHANgE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Required the “HOTOIL” message will be displayed in the odometer along with a chime. 4 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the gASCAP engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon If the vehicle diagnostic system detects a leak or change your personal driving style. in the evaporative system, or the fuel filler cap is loose, Unless reset, this message will continue to display each improperly installed, or damaged, the words “gASCAP” time you turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position. will display in the odometer display area. If this occurs, To turn off the message temporarily, press and release the tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odomTrip Odometer button on the instrument cluster. To reset eter reset button to turn off the “gASCAP” message. the oil change indicator system (after performing the (Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System — OBDII” in scheduled maintenance) perform the following proce“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information). If dure: the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. See your authorized dealer Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do not service center as soon as possible. start the engine). Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies”. CHANgE OIL Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly 3 times within Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change 10 seconds. indicator system. The “CHANgE OIL” message will flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you To reset the trip odometer, first display the trip mileage start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not that you want to reset, “Trip A” or “Trip B.” Then push reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure. and hold the button (approximately 2 seconds) until the display resets to 0 miles (km). The odometer must be in For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle InforTrip Mode to reset the trip odometer. mation Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor17. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Indicator Light mation Center (EVIC)”. This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a This indicator shows that the Electronic Speed problem is detected, the light will come on Control System is ON. while the engine is running. If the light remains 16. Odometer/Trip Odometer Reset Button lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, however see your authoTrip Odometer rized dealer for service as soon as possible. Press and release this button to change the display from If the light is flashing when the engine is running you odometer to “Trip A.” Press and release it a second time may experience power loss, an elevated/rough idle, and to change the display to “Trip B.” Press and release it a increased brake pedal effort, and your vehicle may third time to change the display back to the odometer. require towing. Immediate service is required. 15. Cruise Indicator — If Equipped 4 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The light will come on when the ignition switch is first 20. Turn Signal Indicators turned on and remain briefly as a bulb check. This is The arrows will flash in unison with the exterior normal. If the light does not come on during starting, turn signal, when using the turn signal lever. A have the system checked by an authorized dealer. chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 18. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped (1.6 km) with either turn signal on. This indicator will illuminate when the park NOTE: If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check lights or headlights are turned on. for a defective outside light bulb. 21. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped 19. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on. This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con- 22. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped trol system (ESC) has been turned off by the This light will flash rapidly for approximately driver. 16 seconds when the alarm system is arming. The light will begin to flash slowly indicating that the system is armed. The light will stop flashing when the vehicle is disarmed. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 23. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light — If Equipped should come on. If the light does not come on, have the system inspected by an authorized dealer. This light monitors the ABS. This light will come on when the ignition key is turned to the 24. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/ ON/RUN position and may stay on for ap- Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped proximately three seconds. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator If the ABS light remains on or comes on during driving, Light” in the instrument cluster will come on it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system when the ignition switch is turned to the is not functioning and that service is required, however, ON/RUN position. It should go out with the the conventional brake system will continue to operate engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Innormally provided that the BRAKE warning light is not dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine on. running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced system. If this light remains on after several ignition as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti-Lock cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see Brakes. your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the The ABS warning light should be checked frequently to problem diagnosed and corrected. assure that it is operating properly. Turn the ignition key to the on position, but do not start the vehicle. The light 4 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Activation/ tires.) Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN. equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously. one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumiwhen it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to caused the ESC activation. overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also 25. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect Each tire, including the spare (if provided), the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. should be checked monthly when cold and Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper inflated to the inflation pressure recommended tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the low tire pressure telltale. NOTE: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS CAUTION! malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is The TPMS has been optimized for the original combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for warning have been established for the tire size approximately one minute and then remain continuously equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operailluminated. This sequence will continue upon subse- tion or sensor damage may result when using requent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. placement equipment that is not of the same size, When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys- type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a of reasons, including the installation of replacement or TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the 26. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS monitors emissions, engine, and automatic transto continue to function properly. mission control systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If 4 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL the bulb does not come on when turning the key from LOCK to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly. WARNING! A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others. not require towing. 27. Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If Equipped CAUTION! Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system. It also could affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 CAUTION! 29. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display — If Equipped Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure. This display shows the EVIC messages when the appropriate conditions exist. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” for further information. WARNING! If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle, in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire. MINI-TRIP COMPUTER — IF EQUIPPED The Mini-Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster and features a driver-interactive trip information and temperature display. NOTE: The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera28. High Beam Indicator ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the This light indicates that the headlights are on high displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings beam. Pull the turn signal lever toward the steer- are not updated when the vehicle is not moving. ing wheel to switch the headlights to low beam. 4 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Control Buttons RESET Button To reset the display shown, turn the ignition switch to the ON position, then press and hold the RESET button located on the steering wheel. The following displays can be reset or changed: • Trip A • Trip B Trip Odometer (ODO) This display shows the distance traveled since the last reset. Press and release the STEP button on the instrument cluster to switch from odometer, to Trip A or Trip B. Mini-Trip Control Buttons STEP Button Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last Press the STEP button located on the steering wheel to reset. scroll through sub menus (i.e., Temperature, Trip Functions: Odometer, Trip A, Trip B). UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset. ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster. 4 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The EVIC consists of the following: The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons on the instrument panel • Compass Heading Display (N, S, E, W, NE, NW, SE, SW) switch bank located below the climate controls: • Mileage (Avg/MPG) • Miles To Empty • Low Tire Information (Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) Displays) — if equipped • Timer • Units • System Warnings (Door Ajar, etc.) • Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features) • Outside Temperature Display (°F or °C) • Audio Mode Displays – 12 preset Radio Stations or CD Title and Track number when playing EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 MENU Button SELECT Button Press and release the MENU button to advance Press and release the SELECT Button to accept the display to each of the EVIC Main Menu a selection. The SELECT Button also resets features. Upon reaching the last item in the Main various Trip Functions. Menu the EVIC will advance to the first item in the Main Menu with the next MENU button press and Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Displays release. DOWN Button When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays the following messages: Press and release the DOWN button to advance the display through the various Trip Functions • Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime after one mile traveled) or Personal Settings. COMPASS Button • Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime) Press and release the COMPASS button to • Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime) display the compass heading, the outside tem- • Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single perature, and Audio Info (when the radio is on) chime) screen when the current screen is not the • Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime) compass, outside temp, audio info screen. 4 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • RKE (Remote Keyless Entry) Battery Low (with a • single chime) • • Personal Settings Not Avail – Vehicle Not In PARK • • Personal Settings Not Avail – Vehicle in Motion • • Door Ajar (with vehicle graphic showing which door is • open. A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in motion). • • Doors Ajar (with vehicle graphic showing which doors are open. A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in motion). • Trunk Open (with vehicle graphic showing and open trunk and A single chime ) • Lights On • Key In Ignition • Remote start aborted — Door ajar Remote start aborted — Hood ajar Remote start aborted — Trunk ajar Remote start aborted — Fuel low Remote start disabled — System fault Oil Change Required (with a single chime) Low Tire (with a graphic of the car showing which tire(s) is/are low - with a single chime). Refer to ⬙Tire Pressure Monitoring System⬙ in ⬙Starting and Operating⬙. • Check TPM System (with a single chime) Refer to ⬙Tire Pressure Monitoring System⬙ in ⬙Starting and Operating⬙. Oil Change Required — If Equipped Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The Oil Change Required message will UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 flash in the EVIC display for approximately five seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style. NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary repeat this procedure. EVIC Main Menu To step to each main menu feature press and release the MENU button once for each step. A step from the last Unless reset, this message will continue to display each item in the list will cause the first item in the feature list time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN to be displayed. The following features are in the Main position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and menu: release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance), • Compass perform the following procedure: • Outside Temperature 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not • Audio Information (if radio is on) display start the engine.) • Average Fuel Economy 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times • Distance to Empty within 10 seconds. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. • Tire Pressure Status display 4 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Elapsed Time Compass Display • EVIC Units Selection COMPASS Button • System Status The compass heading indicates the direction the vehicle is facing. Press and release the • Personal Settings compass button to display one of eight compass headings, the outside temperature, and NOTE: For features in the EVIC that can be reset (Average Fuel Economy and Elapsed Time), the EVIC prompts audio information (if the radio is on) if the EVIC display a reset with a SELECT button graphic and the word is not already displaying this screen. RESET next to it. NOTE: The system will display the last known outside When the SELECT button is pressed, the selected feature will reset and RESET ALL will display next to the SELECT button graphic. Pressing SELECT a second time will reset both Average Fuel Economy and Elapsed Time. After three seconds without pressing SELECT, RESET ALL will return to RESET and only the selected feature will have been reset. temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 Automatic Compass Calibration 1. Start the engine. Leave the shift lever in PARK in order to enter the EVIC Programming Menus. This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to calibrate the compass manually. When the ve- 2. Press and release the MENU button until “Personal hicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and the Settings” displays in the EVIC. EVIC will flash the “CAL” indicator until the compass is 3. Press and release the DOWN button until “Calibrate calibrated. You may calibrate the compass by completing Compass Yes” displays in the EVIC. one or more 360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL indicator in the 4. Press and release the SELECT button and the “CAL” EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally. indicator will start flashing. NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and 5. Drive the vehicle slowly (under 5 mph / 8 km/h), an environment free from large metallic objects such as completing one or more circles (in an area free from large buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” indicator turns etc. off. The compass will now function normally. Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate, and the variance has been properly set, you may wish to manually recalibrate the compass. To manually calibrate the compass: 4 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North. To compensate for the differences, the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set, the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading. NOTE: Magnetic and battery powered devices, (such as cell phones, iPod’s, radar detectors, PDA’s and laptops) should be kept away from the top of the instrument Compass Variance Map panel. This is where the compass module is located and such devices may interfere and cause false compass To Change Compass Variance: readings. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Leave the shift lever in PARK. 2. Press and release the MENU button until “Personal Settings” displays in the EVIC. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 3. Press and release the DOWN button until “Compass Distance To Empty (DTE) Variance” and the current Variance Value displays in Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the EVIC. the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is 4. Press and release the SELECT button to increment the determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous Variance Value by one, (one button press per update), and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel until the proper variance zone is selected according to tank level. DTE cannot be reset. the map. NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle NOTE: The Variance Values will wrap around from 15 loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle, regardless of the DTE display value. back to 1. The Default Variance is Zone 8. Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. Average Fuel Economy can be reset by pressing and holding the SELECT button (as prompted in the EVIC display). Upon reset, the history information will be erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset. When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL”. This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display. 4 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Tire PSI Elapsed Time Press and release the MENU button until ⬙Tire PSI⬙ is Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset. displayed. Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the RUN or START position. Tire pressure information is displayed as follows: Elapsed time is displayed as follows: • If tire pressure is OK for all tires, TIRE and a vehicle graphic are displayed with tire pressure values in each hours:minutes:seconds corner or the graphic. Elapsed time can be reset by pressing and holding the • If one or more tires have low pressure, LOW TIRE and SELECT button (as prompted in the EVIC display). Upon a vehicle graphic are displayed with tire pressure reset all digits will change to zeros and time will start values in each corner of the graphic. Tire pressure incrementing again if the ignition switch is in RUN or START. values that are too low will be flashing. • If the Tire Pressure System requires service, ⬙Check EVIC Units Selection (UNITS IN Display) TPM System⬙ is displayed. Tire PSI is an information Displays the units used for the Outside Temperature, only function and cannot be reset. Average Fuel Economy, Distance to Empty and Tire Pressure features. Press and Release the SELECT button to toggle units between ⬙U.S.⬙ and ⬙METRIC⬙. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 System Status Displays SYSTEM OK if there are no active Warning Messages stored. Pressing and releasing the DOWN button when SYSTEM OK is displayed will do nothing. Displays SYSTEM WARNINGS PRESENT if there are active Warning Messages stored. Pressing and releasing the DOWN button when SYSTEM WARNINGS PRESENT is displayed will display each stored warning for each button press. Press and Release the MENU button to return to the Main Menu. Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features) Press and release the DOWN button to display the following programmable features: Language When in this display you may select different languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions. Pressing the SELECT button while in this display selects English, Spanish, French, German, Italian, or Dutch depending on availability. As you continue, the displayed information will be shown in the selected language. Auto Unlock on Exit When ON is selected and the transaxle is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position, all doors will unlock when the Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall driver’s door is opened. To make your selection, press the features when the automatic transaxle is in PARK. SELECT button until ON or OFF appears. Press and release the MENU button until “Personal RKE Unlock Settings” displays in the EVIC. When “Driver Door 1st Press” is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote 4 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When “All Doors 1st Press” is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until “Driver Door 1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears. Sound Horn with Lock When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lamp with Lock feature. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears. without the Sound Horn on lock feature selected. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears. Headlamp Off Delay When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press the SELECT button until 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds appears. Headlamps With Wipers (Available with Auto Headlights Only) When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned Flash Lamp with Lock off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will selection, press the SELECT button until ON or OFF flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the appears. RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.” Key-Off Power Delay When this feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect威 phone (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your selection, press the SELECT button until Off, 45 sec., 5 min., or 10 min. appears. Illumin. Approach When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter. To make your selection, press the SELECT button until “OFF,” “30 sec,” “60 sec,” or “90 sec” appears. Display Units In The EVIC and odometer can be changed between English and Metric units of measure. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until “U.S.” or “METRIC” appears. Compass Variance Refer to “Compass Display” for more information. Calibrate Compass Refer to “Compass Display” for more information. 4 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK Uconnect姞 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF To set the analog clock, located at the top center of the EQUIPPED instrument panel, press and hold the button in until the Refer to your Uconnect威 user’s manual for detailed setting is correct. The clock will adjust slowly at first and operating instructions. then quicker the longer the button is held. Operating Instructions (Voice Command System) — If Equipped Refer to “Voice Command” for further details. Operating Instructions (Uconnect姞 Phone) — If Equipped Refer to “Uconnect威 Phone” for further details. Setting The Analog Clock UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary) UCONNECT姞 130 Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio. Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume, and to the left decreases it. When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played. Uconnect威 130 SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio position to operate the radio. will remain tuned to the new station until you make Operating Instructions — Radio Mode 4 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL another selection. Holding either button will bypass 5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds. stations without stopping, until you release it. RW/FF TIME Button Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the and radio frequency. direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies. Clock Setting Procedure TUNE Control 1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink. Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. SCROLL control knob. Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade 3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to will begin to blink. the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones. 4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade. control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the AM/FM Button mid-range tones. Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode. Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Memory treble tones. When you are receiving a station that you wish to Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a button sound level from the right or left side speakers. is not selected within five seconds after pressing the Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control will not be stored into pushbutton memory. knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between You may add a second station to each pushbutton by the front and rear speakers. repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the 4 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice. Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE: • The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio. Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding • This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), button number will display. recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact Buttons 1 - 6 discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks. commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM Inserting Compact Disc(s) stations). Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD DISC Button label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the AM/FM modes to Disc modes. radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will show the track number, and index time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1. CAUTION! (Continued) • Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can cause damage to the player. EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD CAUTION! • This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only. The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism. • Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism. • The Uconnect威 130 is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded. (Continued) Press the EJECT button to eject the CD. If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it. A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF. NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft-top models (if equipped). 4 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SEEK Button AM/FM Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes. Press the button to select either AM or FM mode. TIME Button Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track. SET/RND Button (Random Play Button) Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace. Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play. RW/FF Notes on Playing MP3 Files Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) recording media and formats are limited. When writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions. button works in a similar manner. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 Supported Media (Disc Types) The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3. Supported Medium Formats (File Systems) display the file name and folder name, and will assign a number instead. With a maximum number of files, exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.) The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names: Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. • Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeWhen reading discs recorded using formats other than character extension) ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read • Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threefiles properly and may be unable to play the file norcharacter extension) mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported. Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. The radio uses the following limits for file systems: Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal • Maximum number of folder levels: 8 CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after • Maximum number of files: 255 writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of • Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in names and folder names is limited. For large numbers longer disc loading times. of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to 4 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file. MPEG Specification MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 Sampling Frequency (kHz) 48, 44.1, 32 Bit Rate (kbps) 320, 256, 224, 192, 160, 128, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32 160, 128, 144, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32, 24, 16, 8 When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to 24, 22.05, 16 MPEG-2 Audio an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the Layer 3 following table are supported. In addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rate. ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios. Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option before writing to the disc. contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files. Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode Playback of MP3 Files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an by the following: MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s • Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than audio system to amplify the source and play through the CD-R media vehicle speakers. • Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to to load than non-multisession discs auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected. • Number of files and folders - Loading times will increase with more files and folders 4 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the UCONNECT姞 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down. TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode) Press this button to change the display to time of day. The time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is OFF). Uconnect威 130 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 Operating Instructions — Radio Mode SEEK Buttons NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch position to operate the radio. to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary) will remain tuned to the new station until you make Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the another selection. Holding either button will bypass radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second stations without stopping, until you release it. time to turn off the radio. Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped Electronic Volume Control Refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The FeaThe electronic volume control turns continuously (360 tures If Your Vehicle”. degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning Voice Command Button Uconnect威 Phone — If the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the Equipped volume, and to the left decreases it. Press this button to operate the Uconnect威 Phone feature When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be (if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect威 Phone” in “Underset at the same volume level as last played. standing The Features If Your Vehicle”. 4 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not Clock Setting Procedure available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With 1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink. Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ screen. SCROLL control knob. Phone Button Uconnect威 Phone — If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect威 Phone feature 3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes (if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect威 Phone” in “Underwill begin to blink. standing The Features If Your Vehicle”. If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not 4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL conavailable on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With trol knob to save time change. Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio screen. 5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds. The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button. Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select and radio frequency. SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, TIME Button UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS procedure, starting at Step 2. will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones. INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only). control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range tones. RW/FF Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones. AM or FM frequencies. Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. sound level from the right or left side speakers. TUNE Control 4 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers. Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone, balance, and fade. MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information. Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types: Program Type No program type or undefined Adult Hits Classical Classic Rock College Country Foreign Language Information Jazz News Nostalgia Oldies Personality 16-Digit Character Display None Adlt Hit Classicl Cls Rock College Country Language Inform Jazz News Nostalga Oldies Persnlty UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 Program Type Public Rhythm and Blues Religious Music Religious Talk Rock Soft Soft Rock Soft Rhythm and Blues Sports Talk Top 40 Weather 16-Digit Character Display Public R&B Rel Musc Rel Talk Rock Soft Soft Rck Soft R&B Sports Talk Top 40 Weather station with the same selected Music Type name. The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode. If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station. SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items: • Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon save time change. is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency 4 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL AM/FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode. SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/ RND button, the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory. You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice. Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display. Buttons 1 - 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM stations). DISC/AUX Button Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will NOTE: show the track number, and index time in minutes and • The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1. to operate the radio. Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play • This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks. Inserting Compact Disc(s) Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded. CAUTION! • This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only. The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism. • Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism. • The Uconnect威 130 is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded. (Continued) 4 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CAUTION! (Continued) • Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can cause damage to the player. EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD. SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes. TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within playing time display to a small CD playing time display. 10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, RW/FF the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it. Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF. begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button convertible or soft-top models (if equipped). works in a similar manner. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 AM/FM Button Supported Media (Disc Types) Press the button to select either AM or FM mode. The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3. SET/RND Button (Random Play Button) Supported Medium Formats (File Systems) Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 compact disc in random order to provide an interesting Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. change of pace. When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ranfiles properly and may be unable to play the file nordomly selected track. mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported. Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop RanThe radio uses the following limits for file systems: dom Play. • Maximum number of folder levels: 8 Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file • Maximum number of files: 255 recording media and formats are limited. When writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions. 4 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file names and folder names is limited. For large numbers of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name, and will assign a number instead. With a maximum number of files, exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.) writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times. Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file. • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names: • Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeWhen using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to character extension) an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the • Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threefollowing table are supported. In addition, variable bit character extension) rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal VBR bit rates. CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 MPEG Specification MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3 Sampling Frequency (kHz) 48, 44.1, 32 24, 22.05, 16 Playback of MP3 Files Bit Rate (kbps) 320, 256, 224, 192, 160, 128, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32 160, 128, 144, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32, 24, 16, 8 When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files. Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following: • Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than CD-R media • Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer to load than non-multisession discs ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not • Number of files and folders - Loading times will supported by the radios. increase with more files and folders Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported. 4 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option before writing to the disc. Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ priority mode. LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display. Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files). The folder list will time out after five seconds. INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if available). Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file. Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers. Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down. NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska. System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode) service that is included with the factory-installed satellite Press this button to change the display to time of day. The radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a weltime of day will display for five seconds (when the come kit that contains general information, including ignition is OFF). how to setup your on-line listening account. For further information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or Uconnect姞 (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast- www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents. ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music, sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios. 4 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID) Selecting Uconnect威 (Satellite) Mode Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A Please have the following information available when CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio calling: mode. 1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Satellite Antenna Number (ESN/SID). To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects 2. Your Vehicle Identification Number. placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps: decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within ESN/SID Access the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posion or above the antenna. tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is Reception Quality selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number following reasons: display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on • The vehicle is parked in an underground parking the radio to exit this screen. structure or under a physical obstacle. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 • Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass channels form of short audio mutes. without stopping until you release it. • Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can SCAN Button cause intermittent reception. • Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before concause signal blockage. tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN Operating Instructions - Uconnect威 (Satellite) button a second time. Mode INFO Button NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informaACC position to operate the radio. tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if availSEEK Buttons able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next additional three seconds will make the radio display the channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will to normal display). 4 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons channel with the same selected Music Type name. causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows. If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be TUNE Control (Rotary) exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel. Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel. SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the MUSIC TYPE Button following items: Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button • Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/ SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the seconds will allow the program format type to be seSirius subscription. lected. Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory RW/FF type. When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory. You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice. Buttons 1 - 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations). Operating Instructions - Uconnect威 Phone (If Equipped) Refer to “Uconnect威 Phone” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”. iPod姞/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED This feature allows an iPod威 or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port, located in the center of the instrument panel below the climate controls. Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding iPod威 control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威 and iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威 software versions may button number will display. not fully support the iPod威 control features. Please visit Apple’s website for software updates. 4 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: • If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate Uconnect威 Multimedia radio User’s Manual for iPod威 or external USB device support capability. • Connecting an iPod威 or consumer electronic audio device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate, plays media, but does not use the iPod威 /MP3 control feature to control the connected device. Connecting The iPod姞 Or External USB Device Use the connection cable to connect an iPod威 or external USB Connector Port USB device to the vehicle’s USB connector port which is located in the center of the instrument panel below the Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to climate controls. the vehicle’s iPod威/USB/MP3 control system (iPod威 or external USB device may take a few minutes to connect), the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches, as described below. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely discharged, it may not communicate with the iPod威/USB/ MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained. Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod威/USB/ MP3 control system may charge it to the required level. Controlling The iPod姞 Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons To get into the iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode and access a connected audio device, either press the “AUX” button on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say ⬙USB⬙ or ⬙Switch to USB⬙. Once in the iPod威/USB/MP3 Using This Feature control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system. USB port: Play Mode • The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album, When switched to iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode, the iPod威 or external USB device automatically starts Play etc.) information on the radio display. mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio • The audio device can be controlled using the radio faceplate may be used to control the iPod威 or external buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod威 contents. USB device and display data: • The audio device battery charges when plugged into • Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific previous track. audio device) 4 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while during play mode will jump to the next track in the playing a track, skips to the next track or press the list, or press the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous VR button and say ⬙Next Track⬙. Track⬙. • Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click, • While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see will jump to the previous track in the list or press the the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.) VR button and say ⬙Previous Track⬙ for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps • Jump backward in the current track by pressing and to the next screen of data for that track. Once all holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press button long enough will jump to the beginning of the will go back to the play mode screen on the radio. current track. • Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio • Jump forward in the current track by pressing and device mode to repeat the current playing track or holding the FF>> button. press the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat Off⬙. • A single press backward << RW or forward FF>> will jump backward or forward respectively, for five • Press the SCAN button to use iPod威/USB/MP3 deseconds. vice scan mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the • Use the << SEEK and SEEK>> buttons to jump to the next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK>> button desired track, when it is playing the track, press the UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the << SEEK and SEEK>> buttons will select the previous and next tracks. • RND button (available on sales code RES radio only): Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod威 or external USB device, or press the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙ or ⬙Shuffle Off⬙. If the RND icon is showing on the radio display, then the shuffle mode is ON. List Or Browse Mode During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the audio device. • TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio device or external USB device. • Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying the track detail on the radio display. Once the track to be played is highlighted on the radio display, press the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track. Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll through the list faster. During fast scroll, a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display may be noticeable. • During all List modes, the iPod威 displays all lists in “wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backward (counterclockwise) to get to the track faster. • In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威 or external USB device. • Preset 1 – Playlists • Preset 2 – Artists • Preset 3 – Albums 4 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is • Preset 4 – Genres another shortcut button to the genre listing on your • Preset 5 – Audiobooks audio device. • Preset 6 – Podcasts • Pressing a PRESET button will display the current CAUTION! list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line. • Leaving the iPod威 or external USB device (or any • To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in exsame PRESET button again to go back to Play mode. treme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s guidelines. • LIST button: The LIST button will display the top • Placing items on the iPod威 or external USB device, level menu of the iPod威 or external USB device. Turn or connections to the iPod威 or external USB device the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device selected and press the TUNE control knob. This will and/or to the connectors. display the next sub-menu list item on the audio device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list. Not all iPod威 or external USB device sub-menu levels are available on this system. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 WARNING! Do not plug in or remove the iPod威 or external USB device while driving. Failure to follow this warning could result in an accident. Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect威 phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the Uconnect威 phone system, but just one can be selected and played. Selecting Different Audio Device 1. Press PHONE button to begin. Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the 2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say Uconnect威 phone system. ⬙Setup⬙, then ⬙Select Audio Devices⬙. Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons 3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the Uconnect威 phone system to list audio devices. To get into the BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on the radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth Next Track Streaming Audio”. Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the Play Mode radio and say “Next Track” to jump to the next track When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can music on your cellular phone. start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but some devices require the music to be initiated on the 4 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Previous Track STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on EQUIPPED the radio and say “Previous Track” to jump to the previous track music on your cellular phone. Browse Browsing is not available on a BTSA device. Only the current song that is playing will display info. Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel) UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 The remote sound system controls are located on the rear Radio Operation surface of the steering wheel, at the three and nine Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next o’clock positions. listenable station, and pressing the bottom of the switch The right-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the will SEEK down for the next listenable station. center, and controls the volume and mode of the sound The button located in the center of the left-hand switch system. Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase will tune to the next preset station that you have prothe volume. Pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will grammed in the radio preset pushbutton. decrease the volume. Pressing the center button changes the operation of the radio from AM to FM, or to CD CD Player mode, depending on which radio is in the vehicle. Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next The left-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once center. The function of the left-hand switch is different, will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second depending on which mode you are in. after the current track begins to play. The following describes the left-hand rocker switch opIf you press the switch up or down twice it plays the eration in each mode. second track; three times, it will play the third, etc. The button in the center of the left-hand switch has no function in this mode. 4 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particuTo keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) precautions: oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known 1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the good disc before considering disc player service. surface. RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES 2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in wiping from center to edge. your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from 3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated ing the disc. by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the or anti-static sprays. antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be 5. Store the disc in its case after playing. turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect威 (if equipped). 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight. CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE 7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of The air conditioning and heating system is designed to outer rotary dials and inner push knobs. make you comfortable in all types of weather. Blower Control CLIMATE CONTROLS Manual Heating And Air Conditioning Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the “O” (OFF) position. There are four blower speeds. NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off) position. Manual Temperature Control 4 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Temperature Control Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures, while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures. Mode Control (Air Direction) Rotate this control to choose from several patterns of air distribution. You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols on the control, or a blend of two of these modes. The closer the setting is to a particular symbol, the more air distribution you receive from that mode. NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con- • Panel denser located in front of the radiator for an accumulaAir is directed through the outlets in the instrution of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct from behind the radiator and through the condenser. airflow. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed condenser, reducing air conditioning performance. so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277 • Bi-Level • Defrost Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets. Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxiNOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, mum blower and temperature settings for best windthere is a difference in temperature between the upper shield and side window defrosting. and lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved comfort during NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix, Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air sunny but cool conditions. Conditioning (A/C) button is not pressed. This dehu• Floor midifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve Air is directed through the floor outlets with a fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary. small amount flowing through the defrost and • Recirculation Control side window demist outlets. Pressing the Recirculation Control button will • Mix temporarily put the system in recirculation Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side mode. This can be used when outside condiwindow demist outlets. This setting works best in tions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the humidity are present. Activating recirculation will cause windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort the LED in the control button to illuminate. while reducing moisture on the windshield. 4 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: • The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. • Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. • When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK Extended use of this mode is not recommended. position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled. • The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather will cause windows to fog on the inside, Air Conditioning Control because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for maximum defogging. Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light will illuminate when • The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging the Air Conditioning system is engaged. when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode Rotating the dial left into the blue area control is set to panel or Bi-Level. of the scale indicates cooler tempera• Recirculated air is not allowed in Defrost modes. If the tures, while rotating right into the red Recirculation button is pressed while in Defrost mode, area indicates warmer temperatures. the LED indicator will flash several times then go out. Recirculation will be disabled automatically when NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds. Defrost mode is selected. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 • MAX A/C For maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculation buttons at the same time. Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped • ECONOMY MODE If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then, move the temperature control to the desired temperature. 4 Automatic Temperature Control 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Automatic Operation The Automatic Temperature Control system automatically maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger. Operation of the system is quite simple. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting the “O” (OFF) position on the blower control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake. 1. Turn the Mode Control knob (on the right) and the 72°F (22°C) is the recommended setting for maximum Blower Control knob (on the left) to AUTO comfort for the average person; however, this may vary. NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat NOTE: occupants only. • The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime 2. Dial in the temperature you would like the system to without affecting automatic operation. maintain by rotating the Temperature Control knob. Once the comfort level is selected, the system will • Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button maintain that level automatically using the heating to flash three times and then turn off. This indicates system. Should the desired comfort level require air that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the conditioning, the system will automatically make the air conditioning is not necessary. adjustment. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 • If your air conditioning performance seems lower than Blower Control expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or For full automatic operation or for insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind automatic blower operation, turn the the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front knob to the AUTO position. In manual fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser, mode there are seven blower speeds reducing air conditioning performance. that can be individual selected. In off position the blower will shut off. • While operating in AUTO, the system will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. The defrost mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass. 4 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic, Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic. This means the operator can override the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired. The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the Blower Control knob (on the left). NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart that follows for details. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 4 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to • Floor change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control Air is directed through the floor outlets with a knob (on the right) to one of the following positions. small amount flowing through the defrost and • Panel side window demist outlets. Air is directed through the outlets in the instru- • Mix ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side airflow. window demist outlets. This setting works best in NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort for maximum airflow to the rear. while reducing moisture on the windshield. • Bi-Level Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets. • Defrost Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxiNOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, mum blower and temperature settings for best windthere is a difference in temperature between the upper shield and side window defrosting. and lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 • Air Conditioner Control NOTE: Press this button to turn on the air • When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled. conditioning during manual operation only. When the air conditioning is • In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may turned on, cool dehumidified air will lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation flow through the outlets selected with mode is not allowed in defrost, in order to improve the Mode control dial. Press this butwindow clearing. Recirculation will be disabled autoton a second time to turn OFF the air matically if Defrost is selected. conditioning. An LED in the button illuminates when • Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows manual compressor operation is selected. to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog, • Recirculation Control press the Recirculation button to return to outside air. The system will automatically control recircuSome temp/humidity conditions will cause captured lation. However, pressing the Recirculation interior air to condense on windows and hamper Control button will temporarily put the system visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow in recirculation mode. This can be used when Recirculation to be selected while in defrost. Attemptoutside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high ing to use the recirculation while in Defrost will cause humidity are present. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn the LED in the control button to illuminate. off. 4 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Most of the time, when in Automatic Operation, you can temporarily put the system into Recirculation Mode by pressing the Recirculation button. However, under certain conditions, while in Automatic Mode, the system is blowing air out the defrost vents. When these conditions are present, and the Recirculation button is pressed, the indicator will flash and then turn off. This tells you that you are unable to go into Recirculation Mode at this time. If you would like the system to go into Recirculation Mode, you must first move the Mode knob to Panel, Mix and then press the Recirculation button. This feature reduces the possibility of window fogging. Operating Tips Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper coolant selection. Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging. Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air suggested control settings for various weather conditions. conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility Outside Air Intake of compressor damage when the system is started again. Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves Window Fogging collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The Mix mode can winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide suffi- and snow. cient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the A/C Air Filter — If Equipped inside in mild but rainy or humid weather. The A/C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from entering NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for the cabin. The filter acts on air coming from outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the passenger compartlong periods as fogging may occur. ment. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Side Window Demisters Your Vehicle” for A/C Air Filter service information or see A side window demister outlet is located at each end of the your authorized dealer for service. Refer to “Maintenance instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct air Schedules” for filter service intervals. toward the side windows when the system is in the FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors. 4 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS 䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 ▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .301 ▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 ▫ Four-Speed Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 ▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 ▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 ▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 ▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .298 䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 ▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 ▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 ▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (62TE) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309 ▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 䡵 AUTOSTICK威 — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .316 ▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .318 5 290 STARTING AND OPERATING ▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 ▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 ▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 ▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 䡵 ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) . . . . . . . . .324 䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .327 ▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .327 ▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .328 ▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 ▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .329 ▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 ▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 ▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .337 ▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .338 ▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .339 䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . .344 ▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344 ▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 ▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 ▫ All Season Tires – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .347 ▫ Summer Or Three Season Tires – If Equipped . . .348 STARTING AND OPERATING 291 ▫ Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 ▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358 ▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 ▫ Premium System – If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .360 ▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . .349 ▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 ▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .350 ▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 ▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 ▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 ▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .354 䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .355 䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .356 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 ▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 ▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 ▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .366 ▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367 ▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367 ▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367 ▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .368 5 292 STARTING AND OPERATING 䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 ▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 ▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 ▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 ▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . .371 ▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 ▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 ▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 ▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 ▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 ▫ Loose Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 ▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 ▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . .376 ▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . .376 ▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 ▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 ▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .378 ▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 ▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 ▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 STARTING AND OPERATING 293 ▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 ▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .389 ▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386 ▫ Recreational Towing – All Models . . . . . . . . . .389 䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 5 294 STARTING AND OPERATING STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING! (Continued) Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts. WARNING! • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Automatic Transmission • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. (Continued) The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving gear. CAUTION! Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed: (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 295 CAUTION! (Continued) • Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed. • Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. • Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed. • Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal. Normal Starting position and release it when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. For vehicles equipped with Tip Start (Six-Speed Transmission), turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C) engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of accelerator pedal. an externally powered electric engine block heater (availFor vehicles not equipped with Tip Start (Four-Speed able from your authorized dealer) is recommended. Transmission), turn the ignition switch to the START 5 296 STARTING AND OPERATING If Engine Fails To Start WARNING! • Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury. • Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. WARNING! (Continued) • If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. Without Tip Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine. This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded. STARTING AND OPERATING 297 CAUTION! To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again. If the engine is flooded, it may start to run, but not have enough power to continue running when the key is released. If this occurs, continue cranking up to 15 seconds with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor, repeat the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures. With Tip Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. CAUTION! To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again. 5 298 STARTING AND OPERATING After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up. ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED WARNING! Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution. The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a CAUTION! grounded, three-wire extension cord. The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed: hour to have an adequate warning effect on the engine. • Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to The engine block heater cord is bundled under the hood a complete stop. between the headlight assembly and the Totally Inte- • Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle grated Power Module (Fuse Box) on the driver’s side of has come to a complete stop and the engine is at the vehicle. idle speed. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 299 CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING! • Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed. • Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly pressing on the brake pedal. • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing on the brake pedal. NOTE: You MUST press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK. (Continued) 5 300 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key. Once the key is removed, the shift lever is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ignition key and lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 301 out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interpedal must be pressed. lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/ Four-Speed Automatic Transmission — If OFF position. The key can only be removed from the Equipped ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position, The shift lever position display (located in the instrument and once removed, the shift lever is locked in PARK. cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You must NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK key in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and this section). To drive, move the shift lever from PARK or stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position. service. The electronically-controlled transmission provides a Key Ignition Park Interlock precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission hundred miles (kilometers). Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System 5 302 STARTING AND OPERATING Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. lever in PARK first, and then apply the parking brake. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before moving the shift lever between these gears. placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to Gear Ranges move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precauDO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill NEUTRAL into another gear range. grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. WARNING! This is especially important when the engine is cold. • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the PARK parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle moveThis range supplements the parking brake by locking the ment and possible injury or damage. transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in (Continued) motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range. STARTING AND OPERATING 303 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to move the shift lever rearward (with the brake pedal released) after you have placed it in PARK. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle. • It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the ignition key. Once the key is removed, the shift lever is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. (Continued) (Continued) 5 304 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. • Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you must turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could result. • DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain. The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position: • When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated. • Look at the shift lever position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position. STARTING AND OPERATING 305 • With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK. REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. NEUTRAL Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine may be started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle. WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. CAUTION! Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. DRIVE Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe (Continued) This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission 5 306 STARTING AND OPERATING automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris- converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter tics under all normal operating conditions. Clutch” in this section). During extremely cold temperaWhen frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as tures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condilimited to second gear only. Normal operation will retions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or sume once the transmission temperature has risen to a while towing heavy trailers), select the ⬙3⬙ range. Under suitable level. these conditions, using the ⬙3⬙ range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing exces- DRIVE 3 sive shifting and heat buildup. This range eliminates shifts into fourth gear. The transmission will operate normally in first and second gear. Shifts into third may be delayed to provide second gear operation at higher speeds. Using the ⬙3⬙ range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life During cold temperatures, transmission operation may by reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up. The ⬙3⬙ be modified depending on engine and transmission range should also be used when descending steep grades temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im- to avoid brake system distress. proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the powertrain controller will modify the DRIVE and “3” range shift points. This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating. STARTING AND OPERATING 307 In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the Use this range for engine braking when descending very following steps: steep grades. In this range, the transmission will downshift for maximum engine braking, and upshifts will 1. Stop the vehicle. occur only to prevent engine overspeed. 2. Shift the transmission into PARK. Transmission Limp Home Mode 3. Turn the engine OFF. Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could 4. Wait approximately 10 seconds. result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home 5. Restart the engine. Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected. 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operoperation. ate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recomdriven to an authorized dealer for service without dam- mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your aging the transmission. earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur. LOW 5 308 STARTING AND OPERATING If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer Torque Converter Clutch service is required. A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A Overdrive Operation clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at The automatic transmission includes an electronically calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different controlled Overdrive (fourth gear). The transmission will feeling or response during normal operation in the upper automatically shift into Overdrive if the following con- gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some ditions are present: accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages. • the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm [usu• the transmission fluid has reached an adequate ally after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving]. Because the temperature, engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is • the engine coolant has reached an adequate not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not temperature, shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal. Shifting between the DRIVE and 3 ranges, when the transmission is • vehicle speed is sufficiently high, and sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the transmission is • the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator. able to shift into and out of Overdrive. STARTING AND OPERATING 309 Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when The shift lever position display (located in the instrument moving the shift lever between these gears. cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEU(refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in TRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick威 shift positions. Manual this section). To drive, move the shift lever from PARK or shifts can be made using the AutoStick威 shift control (refer to “AutoStick威” in “Starting And Operating” for NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position. further information). Moving the shift lever to the left or The electronically-controlled transmission provides a right (-/+) while in the AutoStick威 position (below the precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are Drive position) will manually select the transmission self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal cluster as 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers). Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (62TE) — If Equipped 5 310 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold. PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range. Shift Lever When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift lever in PARK first, and then apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to NEUTRAL into another gear range. move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Gear Ranges STARTING AND OPERATING 311 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. • Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to move the shift lever rearward (with the brake pedal released) after you have placed it in PARK. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle. • It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the ignition key. Once the key is removed, the shift lever is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. (Continued) (Continued) 5 312 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. • Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you must turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could result. • DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain. The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position: • When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated. • Look at the shift lever position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position. STARTING AND OPERATING 313 • With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK. REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. NEUTRAL Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine may be started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle. WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. CAUTION! Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. DRIVE Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe (Continued) This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission 5 314 STARTING AND OPERATING is warm (refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this section). During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be limited to third gear only. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as level. when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or Transmission Limp Home Mode while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick威 shift Transmission function is monitored electronically for control (refer to “AutoStick威” in this section) to select a abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home will improve performance and extend transmission life Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected. automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second, third, and fourth gears, direct fifth gear and overdrive sixth gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions. During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission. STARTING AND OPERATING 315 In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the service is required. following steps: Overdrive Operation 1. Stop the vehicle. The automatic transmission includes an electronically 2. Shift the transmission into PARK. 3. Turn the engine OFF. 4. Wait approximately 10 seconds. controlled Overdrive (sixth gear). The transmission will automatically shift into the Overdrive gear if the following conditions are present: • the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, 5. Restart the engine. • the transmission fluid has reached an adequate temperature, 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal • the engine coolant has reached an adequate operation. temperature, NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom- • vehicle speed is sufficiently high, and mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has • the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator. diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur. 5 316 STARTING AND OPERATING Torque Converter Clutch AUTOSTICK姞 — IF EQUIPPED A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages. AutoStick威 is a driver-interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control, giving you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick威 allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This system can also provide you with more control during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, and many other situations. NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm [usually after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving]. Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal. Using the AutoStick威 shift control, when the transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive. Operation When the shift lever is in the AutoStick威 position (below the DRIVE position), it can be moved from side to side. This allows the driver to manually select the transmission gear being used. Moving the shift lever to the left (-) triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an upshift. The current gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster. STARTING AND OPERATING 317 In AutoStick威 mode, the transmission will shift up or • If a downshift would cause the engine to over-speed, down when the driver moves the shift lever to the right that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine (+) or left (-), unless an engine lugging or overspeed • Avoid using speed control when AutoStick威 is condition would result. It will remain in the selected gear engaged. until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described below. • Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick威 is engaged. • The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver • If the system detects powertrain overheating, the transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off. vehicle is accelerated. • You can start out, from a stop, in any gear except top • If the system detects a problem, it will disable the AutoStick威 mode and the transmission will return to gear. Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in the automatic mode until the problem is corrected. second gear. Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions. To disengage AutoStick威 mode, return the shift lever to • The transmission will automatically upshift when nec- the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick威 position at any time without taking your foot essary to prevent engine over-speed. off the accelerator pedal. 5 318 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! WARNING! Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, causing an accident or personal injury. Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.). DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Traction Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front (driving) wheels. When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed: 1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy. STARTING AND OPERATING 319 2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. Flowing/Rising Water 3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible. 4. Keep tires properly inflated. 5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop. DRIVING THROUGH WATER WARNING! Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. Driving through water more than a few inches/ centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure Shallow Standing Water safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so. 5 320 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) • Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it. Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle. • Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water. • Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. This will minimize wave effects. • Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. • Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 321 WARNING! • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes. • Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you stranded. • Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost. If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers. NOTE: • Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system. 5 322 STARTING AND OPERATING • Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any way damage the steering system. PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK. WARNING! Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible. CAUTION! Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible. Damage to the power steering pump may occur. Parking Brake STARTING AND OPERATING 323 The parking brake lever is located in the center console. To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever completely. When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The When the parking brake is applied with the ignition parking brake should always be applied whenever the switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument driver is not in the vehicle. cluster will illuminate. NOTE: • When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle. • This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. 5 WARNING! • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. (Continued) 324 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision. • Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury. CAUTION! If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The system operates with a separate computer to modulate the hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and avoid skidding on slippery surfaces. STARTING AND OPERATING 325 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop. • The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. • The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. • The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. (Continued) The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System. The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake Warning Light” is not on. 5 326 STARTING AND OPERATING If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the bulb repaired as soon as possible. ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops. You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into anti-lock: If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “Anti-Lock • The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a Brake Warning Light” remain on, the Anti-Lock Brake short time after the stop), (ABS) and Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) Systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS • the clicking sound of solenoid valves, system is required. See your authorized dealer. • brake pedal pulsations, When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you • and a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related end of the stop. motor noises. These noises are the system performing its These are all normal characteristics of ABS. self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working properly. This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h). STARTING AND OPERATING 327 WARNING! The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals. Control (ESC). All systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC. Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions. The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking. Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and Operating” for further information. type, and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer. WARNING! ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional advanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS), and Electronic Stability The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The (Continued) 5 328 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. Traction Control System (TCS) This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the “Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section of this manual. Brake Assist System (BAS) The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated. STARTING AND OPERATING 329 WARNING! • The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. • The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. • The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over/under steer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition • Over-steer - when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position. • Under-steer - when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position. 5 330 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. ESC Operating Modes All ESC equipped vehicles can choose the following ESC operating modes: ESC On This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this mode. This mode should be used for almost all driving situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off” for specific reasons as noted below. Partial ESC Mode This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC Off” switch (located in the lower switch bank below the heater/air conditioning controls). When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS portion of ESC, except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section, has been disabled and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other stability features of ESC STARTING AND OPERATING 331 function normally, with the exception of engine power To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the “ESC Off” reduction. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle switch. This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of is in deep snow, sand, or gravel conditions and more operation. wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction. WARNING! In partial ESC mode, the engine power reduction feature of ESC is disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced. ESC Off Switch 5 332 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off” mode by pressing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC on again by momentarily pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion. ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions. STARTING AND OPERATING 333 NOTE: TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION • The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” Tire Markings and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON. • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously. • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation. 5 The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off. 1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN) 2 — Size Designation 3 — Service Description 4 — Maximum Load 5 — Maximum Pressure 6 — Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades 334 STARTING AND OPERATING • Temporary spare tires are spares designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure • P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Exmolded into the sidewall preceding the size designaample: T145/80D18 103M. tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H. • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design • European-Metric tire sizing is based on European standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded design standards. Tires designed to this standard have into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT. the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. NOTE: • LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. STARTING AND OPERATING 335 Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE: Size Designation: P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards T or S = Temporary spare tire 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) — Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) R = Construction code — ⬙R⬙ means radial construction — ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction 15 = Rim diameter in inches (in) 5 336 STARTING AND OPERATING EXAMPLE: Service Description: 95 = Load Index — A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol — A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions — The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits) Load Identification: ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire Light Load (LL) = Light load tire C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure— Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire STARTING AND OPERATING 337 Tire Identification Number (TIN) The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire. EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation — This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) —03 means the 3rd week. 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) —01 means the year 2001 — Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 5 338 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Terminology And Definitions Term B-Pillar Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Maximum Inflation Pressure Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Tire Placard Definition The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures. STARTING AND OPERATING 339 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door. 5 Tire Placard Location 340 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire And Loading Information Placard 3) tire size designed for your vehicle 4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires. Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section of this manual. Tire and Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the: 1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2) total weight your vehicle can carry NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in this section. STARTING AND OPERATING 341 To determine the maximum loading conditions of your 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 the weight referenced here. = 650 lbs [295 kg]). 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occusafely exceed the available cargo and luggage load pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or capacity calculated in Step 4. XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. manual to determine how this reduces the available 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pascargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg. Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 5 342 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: • The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle. • For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg). STARTING AND OPERATING 343 5 344 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them. TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure: Safety WARNING! • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions. • Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure. • Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure. • Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 345 WARNING! (Continued) • Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left. • Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure. stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering. Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredictable steering response. Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right. Economy Tire Inflation Pressures Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption. The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door. The tire pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. properly inflated even when they are under-inflated. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the 5 346 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem. Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the winter. Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), “cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not outside temperature condition. been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla- build up or your tire pressure will be too low. tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditemperature changes. tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle STARTING AND OPERATING 347 loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- Radial Ply Tires tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading WARNING! and cold tire inflation pressures. Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle WARNING! poorly. The instability could cause a collision. AlHigh speed driving with your vehicle under maxiways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your combine them with other types of tires. tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in maximum capacity at continuous speeds above the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs. 75 mph (120 km/h). All Season Tires – If Equipped All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring, summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on 5 348 STARTING AND OPERATING the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the handling of your vehicle. safety and handling of your vehicle. Summer Or Three Season Tires – If Equipped Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry was originally equipped with your vehicle and should conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph on ice. Summer tires will not contain the all season (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for sidewall. Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of tire inflation pressures. your vehicle. While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid Snow Tires and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states produring the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types. mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. STARTING AND OPERATING 349 Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel – If Equipped CAUTION! Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take wheel equivalent in look and function to the original your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire installed. Damage to the vehicle may result. rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. tire rotation pattern. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equipcompact spare by looking at the spare tire description on ment tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching tempothe Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/ with one of the following types of non-matching tempo80D18 103M. rary use spares; compact, full size, or limited-use. Do not install more than one non-matching temporary use spare T, S = Temporary Spare Tire tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time. 5 350 STARTING AND OPERATING Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip- Full Size Spare – If Equipped ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. on your vehicle at the first opportunity. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size Do not install more than one compact spare tire and spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the wheel on the vehicle at any given time. original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity. WARNING! Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as STARTING AND OPERATING 351 your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the Tire Spinning original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not first opportunity. spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopWARNING! ping when you are stuck. Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side door opening. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control. Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. 5 352 STARTING AND OPERATING These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. replaced. Life Of Tire Tread Wear Indicators The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to: • Driving style • Tire pressure • Distance driven • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher, and summer tires, typically have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended. 1 — Worn Tire 2 — New Tire STARTING AND OPERATING 353 WARNING! Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Information” placard for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire. It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match with oil, grease, and gasoline. those of the original wheels. Replacement Tires It is recommended you contact your original equipment The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu- equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva- safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. lent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading 5 354 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle. • Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision. • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control. (Continued) CAUTION! Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings. TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) Due to limited clearance, tire chains or traction devices are not recommended. CAUTION! Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are used. STARTING AND OPERATING 355 The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross” shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at does not apply to some directional tires that must not be different loads and perform different steering, driving, reversed. and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates. TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed. 5 Tire Rotation 356 STARTING AND OPERATING also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased presThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the sure. driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure. The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 warning limit for any reason, including low temperature psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when effects and natural pressure loss through the tire. the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low tire cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to Light” to turn off. The system will automatically update properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) STARTING AND OPERATING 357 vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. CAUTION! • The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. • After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor. 5 358 STARTING AND OPERATING • Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in • The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care the tire. and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire Base System failure or condition. NOTE: • The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to while adjusting your tire pressure. monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each • Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. readings to the Receiver Module. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly stopping ability. and to maintain the proper pressure. • The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain The TPMS consists of the following components: correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure • Receiver Module gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitor- • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors ing Telltale Light.” • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light STARTING AND OPERATING 359 Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will illuminate in the instrument cluster, a ⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message will be displayed for a minimum of five seconds and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” and ⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. Check TPMS Warning The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid when a system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur due to any of the following: 1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors. 2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals. 3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings. 5 360 STARTING AND OPERATING 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. NOTE: 4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will sound and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. 1. The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS the TPMS will update automatically and the “Tire will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire. Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF, as 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road long no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warntire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The ing limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes sound and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to Light” will turn ON and a ⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message will receive this information. be displayed for a minimum of five seconds. Premium System – If Equipped 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to then remain on solid. STARTING AND OPERATING 361 monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module. The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. In addition, the Electronic Vehicle and to maintain the proper pressure. Information Center (EVIC) will display a graphic showThe TPMS consists of the following components: ing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing. • Receiver Module • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, and inflate all tires with low pressure (those flashing in • Three Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold wheel-wells) placard pressure value. Once the system receives the • Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages, updated tire pressures, the system will automatically which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information update, the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flashing, and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” Center (EVIC) • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light 5 362 STARTING AND OPERATING will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPM sensors. TPMS to receive this information. Check TPMS Warning 2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals. When a system fault is detected, a chime will sound and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on 3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In housings. addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYS4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. TEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. indicate which sensor is not being received. The EVIC will also display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, message for a minimum of five seconds when a system providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale detected. In this case, the ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ mesLight” will no longer flash, and the ⬙CHECK TPM sage is then followed with a graphic display with presSYSTEM⬙ message will no longer display, and a pressure sure values still shown. This indicates that the pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault values are still being received from the TPM sensors but can occur due to any of the following: they may not be located in the correct vehicle position. STARTING AND OPERATING 363 The system still needs to be serviced as long as the 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is displayed. 15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and NOTE: then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a 1. The compact spare tire (if so equipped) does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire. 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road 4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warnwill flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on ing limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain ON, a solid, and the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and chime will sound, and the EVIC will still display a then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. flashing pressure value in the graphic display. 5 364 STARTING AND OPERATING 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. General Information • This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses: United States Canada KR5S18002015B 267T-S180015B FUEL REQUIREMENTS This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and fuel economy and performance when usRSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the ing high-quality unleaded “regular” gasofollowing conditions: line having an octane rating of 87. The use • This device may not cause harmful interference. of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines. STARTING AND OPERATING 365 Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle. Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance, and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available. Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.” Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality. The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components. Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates may be used in your vehicle. CAUTION! DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these (Continued) 5 366 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! (Continued) blends may result in starting and driveability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol. • operate in a lean mode • OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on • poor engine performance • poor cold start and cold drivability • increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with Problems that result from using gasoline containing E-85 perform the following: Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol • drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer) are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may • change the engine oil and oil filter not be covered under warranty. E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles • disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E-85 fuel. content may void the vehicle’s warranty. If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: STARTING AND OPERATING 367 MMT In Gasoline Materials Added To Fuel MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline. All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel. Fuel System Cautions 5 CAUTION! Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s performance: • The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system. (Continued) 368 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! (Continued) • An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance. • The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer. NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING! Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning: • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 369 WARNING! (Continued) • Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open. FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED 5 E-85 General Information The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline-only powered vehicles. E-85 Fuel Cap CAUTION! Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can operate on E-85. 370 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame. Fuel Requirements E-85 Badge Ethanol Fuel (E-85) E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels. STARTING AND OPERATING 371 For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternat- • Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully ing between E-85 and unleaded gasoline is recomcompatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be mended. caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that: additive, such as MOPAR威 Injector Cleanup or • you do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when Techron may be used. refueling Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles • you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles least 5 miles (8 km) FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formuObserving these precautions will avoid possible hard lated engine oils. These special requirements are included starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability in MOPAR威 engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting during warm up. Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet NOTE: the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395 • Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With contains additional requirements, developed during exnon-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, you may experience tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to hard starting and rough idle following start up even if Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR威 or an the above recommendations are followed, especially equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395. when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C). 5 372 STARTING AND OPERATING Starting Replacement Parts The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations) until the engine is fully warmed up. Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts. NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C). Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle. Cruising Range Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon (mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation. CAUTION! Maintenance CAUTION! Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect driveability. STARTING AND OPERATING 373 ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the left rear quarter panel of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle. 5 Fuel Filler Door After removing the gas cap, place the gas cap tether cable over a hook on the inside of the fuel door. This keeps the gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle’s surface. 374 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! • Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap (gas cap). • A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on. • To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full. Tether Cable NOTE: If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle. WARNING! • Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 375 WARNING! (Continued) Loose Filler Cap Message If the vehicles diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap in loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a “gASCAP” message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until a “clicking” sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the trip odometer reset button to turn off the message. If the problem persists, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice NOTE: in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the • Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound. problem will turn the MIL off. This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled. • Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and doing so may cause the MIL to turn on. • A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place gas containers on the ground while filling. • When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full. 5 376 STARTING AND OPERATING VEHICLE LOADING Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to load must be limited so that you do not exceed the the rear of the driver’s door. GVWR. The label contains the following information: Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) • Name of manufacturer The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear • Month and year of manufacture axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or • Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) rear GAWR. • Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front Vehicle Certification Label • Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) • Type of Vehicle • Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH) The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN. WARNING! Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. STARTING AND OPERATING 377 Overloading Loading The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR. To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight. Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate. The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR. Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately. It is important that you distribute the load TRAILER TOWING evenly over the front and rear axles. Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR. In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible. 5 378 STARTING AND OPERATING To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to and recommendations in this manual concerning ve- measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be hicles used for trailer towing. supported by the scale. Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) you in understanding the following information: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further information. The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination. NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg) allowance for the presence of a driver. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle CertificaThe GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem- information. porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and STARTING AND OPERATING 379 WARNING! It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer. Weight-Carrying Hitch A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or Tongue Weight (TW) some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the of hitches are the most popular on the market today and hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less they are commonly used to tow small- and mediumthan 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must sized trailers. consider this as part of the load on your vehicle. 5 380 STARTING AND OPERATING Trailer Hitch Classification The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition. Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg) II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg) IV - Extra Heavy 10,000 lbs (4 540 kg) Class Class Class Class Duty Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain. All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle. STARTING AND OPERATING 381 Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain. Engine/Transmission 2.4L/Auto 3.6L/Auto Max. Frontal Area Max. Gross Trailer Wt. (GTW) 1,000 lbs (450 kg) 11 sq.ft. (1.0 sq.m) (See Note 2) 22 sq.ft. (2.0 sq.m) 1,000 lbs (450 kg) Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds. Note 1: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further information. Max. Trailer Tongue Wt. (See Note 1) 100 lbs (45 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg) all four-cylinder engines with automatic transmission. Please see your authorized dealer for additional information. Trailer And Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the Note 2: Enclosed trailers or open utility trailers with Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your front shields/guards are not recommended for use with 5 382 STARTING AND OPERATING vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions. Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle: • The tongue weight of the trailer. • The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle. Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on • The weight of the driver and all passengers. your bumper or trailer hitch. NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle. STARTING AND OPERATING 383 Towing Requirements To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended: CAUTION! • Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle or other parts could be damaged. • Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads. WARNING! Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible: • Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and it will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision. • When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure, or tires. (Continued) 5 384 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners. • Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels. • GCWR must not be exceeded. • Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded: (Continued) 1. Max loading as defined on the “Tire and Loading Information” placard. 2. GTW 3. GAWR 4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized. STARTING AND OPERATING 385 Towing Requirements – Tires • Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire. replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits. Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes • Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and OperThis could cause inadequate braking and possible ating” for proper tire inflation procedures. personal injury. • Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is sures before trailer usage. required when towing a trailer with electronically • Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the brake controller is not required. proper inspection procedure. • Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over • When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of mation” in “Starting and Operating” for the proper tire 2,000 lbs (907 kg). 5 386 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! WARNING! (Continued) If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances. • Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a collision. Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And Wiring WARNING! • Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you need them and could have a collision. (Continued) Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety. Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic. STARTING AND OPERATING 387 Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, select the ⬙3⬙ range (with four-speed transmission) or select a lower gear using the AutoStick威 shift control (with six-speed transmission). NOTE: Check the transmission fluid level (four-speed transmission only) before towing. The six-speed transmission does not require a fluid level check before towing. If, however, you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, see your authorized dealer immediately for assistance. AutoStick威 – If Equipped NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, will improve perfor- – When using the AutoStick威 shift control, select the highest gear that allows for adequate performance and mance and extend transmission life by reducing excesavoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “4” if sive shifting and heat build-up. This action will also the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or provide better engine braking. “2” if needed to maintain the desired speed. If you REGULARLY TOW a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation, then change the auto- – Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to prevent excess heat generation. A reduction in vehicle matic transmission fluid and filter as specified for “pospeed may be required to avoid extended driving at lice, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.” Refer to the high RPM. Return to a higher gear or vehicle speed “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance when grade and road conditions allow. intervals. 5 388 STARTING AND OPERATING Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped Cooling System • Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads. To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions: • When using the speed control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until City Driving you can get back to cruising speed. When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed. maximize fuel efficiency. Highway Driving Reduce speed. Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily. STARTING AND OPERATING 389 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Flat Tow Dolly Tow On Trailer Wheels OFF the Ground NONE Front Rear ALL All Models NOT ALLOWED OK NOT ALLOWED OK 3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the transmission in PARK. Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a 4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow the dolly manufacturer’s instructions. this procedure: 5. Release the parking brake. 1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following the dolly manufacturer’s instructions. Recreational Towing – All Models 2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly. 5 390 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! • DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result. • Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS 䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .392 ▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .392 䡵 JUMP-STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405 ▫ Engine Oil Overheating (2.4L Engine Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .394 ▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 ▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 ▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395 ▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396 ▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405 ▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407 䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . .409 䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411 䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .412 ▫ Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 6 392 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the instrument panel, below the radio. potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action. Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • On the highways — Slow down. tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming • In city traffic — While stopped, put transaxle in traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed. turn off the Hazard Warning flashers. This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position. NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery. CAUTION! Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle, when safe. Turn the air conditioner off and wait until the pointer drops back into the normal range. After appropriate action has been taken, if the pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for service. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 393 NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition: • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat. WARNING! You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat Engine Oil Overheating (2.4L Engine Only) — If Equipped from the engine cooling system. During sustained high-speed driving or trailer tow up long grades on a hot day, the engine oil temperature may become too hot. If this happens, the “HOTOIL” message flashes in the odometer and the vehicle speed will be reduced to 53 mph (85 km/h) until the engine oil temperature is reduced. 6 394 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NOTE: The vehicle speed is reduced to a maximum of 53 mph (85 km/h). You may of course, reduce your vehicle speed further if needed. JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING! • Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. • Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. • The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas. Jack Location The jack and jack-handle are stowed under the load floor in the trunk. Spare Tire Stowage The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor in the trunk. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 395 Spare Tire Removal Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down. WARNING! Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers. 3. Set the parking brake. 4. Place the shift lever into PARK (automatic transmission) or REVERSE (manual transmission). 5. Turn OFF the ignition. Spare Tire And Jack Storage Preparations For Jacking 1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery areas. 6 396 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire, block the left rear wheel. NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the vehicle is being jacked. Jacking Instructions WARNING! Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle: (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle. • Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers. • Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised. • Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in REVERSE. • Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack. • Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack. • Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. (Continued) WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 397 WARNING! (Continued) • Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change. • If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic. • To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground. CAUTION! Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle. NOTE: Refer to the Compact Spare Tire section of Tires-General Information--for information about the spare tire, its use, and operation. 1. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen the lug wrench, and remove the wrench from the jack assembly. Jack Warning Label NOTE: The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack with two attachment points. When the jack is partially expanded, the tension between the two attachment points holds the jack handle in place. 6 398 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION! Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in Step 3. Removing Jack Handle From Jack 2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground. Jacking Locations WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 399 3. There is a front and rear jacking location on each side of the vehicle. Rear Jacking Location Front Jacking Location 4. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the jack head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the wheel to be changed. Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged. 6 400 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire. 5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right, using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability. 6. Remove the wheel nuts, and pull the wheel and wheel covers (where applicable) off the hub. Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts. CAUTION! Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 401 WARNING! • To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury. • To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp edges. 7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left. Mounting Spare Tire 8. Finish tightening the nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice. The correct wheel nut torque is 100 ft lbs (135 N·m). If you doubt that you have tightened the nuts correctly, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station. 6 402 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 9. Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is Road Tire Installation free. Release the emergency brake before driving the Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers vehicle. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the 1. Mount the road tire on the axle. assembly using the means provided. 2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mounting WARNING! studs which are on each side of the valve stem. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in WARNING! the places provided. 10. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area and have the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible. 11. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct the tire pressure as required. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 403 3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand, snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover. 4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. WARNING! Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap 1 — Valve Stem 2 — Valve Notch 3 — Wheel Lug Nut 4 — Wheel Cover 5 — Mounting Stud To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury. 5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. 6 404 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the WARNING! wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, each nut has been tightened twice. The correct tight- do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle ness of each lug nut is 100 ft/lbs (135 N·m). If in doubt has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may about the correct tightness, have them checked with a result in personal injury. torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service 3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack station. handle counterclockwise. 7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly 4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased seated against the wheel. leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until Vehicles Without Wheel Covers each nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft/lbs (135 N·m). If in doubt 1. Mount the road tire on the axle. about the correct tightness, have them checked with a 2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the station. lug nuts. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 405 5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel. JUMP-STARTING If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. CAUTION! Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur. WARNING! Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury. NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and Preparations For Jump-Start precautions. The battery in your vehicle is located between the left front headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash shield. To allow jump-starting there are remote battery posts located on the left side of the engine compartment. 6 406 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! Remote Battery Posts 1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (covered with protective cap) 2 — Remote Negative (-) Post • Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades. • Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured. • Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery. 1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK. 2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 407 3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive 4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park (+) battery post. To remove the cover, press the locking the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the tab and pull upward on the cover. parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF. WARNING! Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result. Jump-Starting Procedure WARNING! Locking Tab Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion. 6 408 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION! WARNING! Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle. Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury. 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery. battery. 3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in negative (-) post of the booster battery. the reverse sequence: 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper 6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the disthe discharged battery. charged battery. 7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 409 8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery. CAUTION! (Continued) battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery 9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable life and/or prevent the engine from starting. from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE 10. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote posi- If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it tive (+) battery post of the discharged vehicle. can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle, steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the you should have the battery and charging system in- front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE, while gently pressing the accelerator. Use spected at your authorized dealer. the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels, or CAUTION! racing the engine. Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s (Continued) 6 410 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION! CAUTION! Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle. • When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result. • Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring). NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 411 WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE 3. Remove the rubber cupholder liner. Squeeze one side of the liner’s center to expose its edge and facilitate removal. 4. Turn the ignition to the ACC or ON/RUN position, but do not start the engine. 5. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal. 6. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the access hole (at the front of the cupholder) and push and hold the override release lever forward. 7. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position. If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be 8. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL. moved out of the PARK position, you can use the 9. Reinstall the cupholder liner. following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever: 1. Turn the engine OFF. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. 6 412 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a towing service. Towing Condition Flat Tow Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Wheels OFF the Ground NONE Rear Flatbed Front ALL Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed. All Models If transmission is operable: • Transmission in NEUTRAL • 25 mph (40 km/h) max speed • 15 mi (24 km) max distance OK BEST METHOD If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACC position. If your vehicle’s battery is discharged, see ⬙Shift Lever Override⬙ in ⬙What To Do In Emergencies⬙ for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK for towing. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 413 CAUTION! • Do not use sling type equipment when towing. Damage to the fascia will occur. • When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing. • Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result. The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all four wheels on the ground) under the following conditions: • The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. • The towing distance must not exceed 15 mi (24 km). • The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be towed faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than 15 mi (24 km), it must be towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a flatbed truck, towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels raised). CAUTION! Towing faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than 15 mi (24 km) with front wheels on the ground can cause severe transmission damage. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 6 414 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK/OFF position. Flatbed towing is the preferred towing method. However, if a flatbed towing vehicle is not available, wheel lift towing equipment may be used. Rear towing (with the front wheels on the ground) is not allowed, as transmission damage will occur. If rear towing is the only alternative, the front wheels must be placed on a towing dolly. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle. CAUTION! Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L . . . . . . . . . .417 ▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .418 ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .419 ▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427 ▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .419 ▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .420 ▫ A/C Air Filter – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .429 䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421 䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421 䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .422 ▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 ▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 ▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 ▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432 ▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433 ▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435 7 416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441 ▫ Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461 ▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443 ▫ Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463 ▫ Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 ▫ Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463 ▫ Cleaning Center Console Cupholders. . . . . . . .453 䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454 ▫ Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454 ▫ Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 ▫ License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465 䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466 䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459 䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467 䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460 ▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467 䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461 ▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir — Automatic Transmission Dipstick — Brake Fluid Reservoir — Integrated Power Module (Fuses) — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Air Cleaner Filter 8 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Coolant Pressure Cap 10 — Engine Oil Dipstick 11 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L 1 2 3 4 — — — — Engine Coolant Reservoir Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Brake Fluid Reservoir Integrated Power Module (Fuses) 5 6 7 8 — Air Cleaner Filter — Engine Oil Dipstick — Engine Oil Fill — Washer Fluid Reservoir MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations. If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. CAUTION! • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed. • If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or improperly installed. A “GASCAP” message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the trip odometer “Reset” button to turn off the message. If the problem 7 420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE persists, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off. Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test. Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass do the following: an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. crank or start the engine. For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction 2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over. Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II 3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON system is ready for testing. position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS of a normal bulb check. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421 4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is happen: ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced • The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine the ignition or start the engine. This means that your running. vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/M station. REPLACEMENT PARTS • The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station. Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was warranty. recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, DEALER SERVICE you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personsystem to update. A recheck with the above test routine nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are may then indicate that the system is now ready. 7 422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE available which include detailed service information for MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before The pages that follow contain the required maintenance attempting any procedure yourself. services determined by the engineers who designed your NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control vehicle. systems may void your warranty and could result in civil Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed penalties being assessed against you. maintenance schedule, there are other components which WARNING! You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. may require servicing or replacement in the future. CAUTION! • Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs, damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center. (Continued) MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423 CAUTION! (Continued) • Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine, transmission, power steering or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure. Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight. Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading. Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the dipstick. Either the range markings consist of a crosshatch zone marked SAFE or a crosshatch zone marked with MIN at the low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the range. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the low end of the range marking will raise the oil level to the high end of the range marking. 7 424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This could damage your engine. Also, be sure the oil fill cap is replaced and tightened after adding oil. Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil Identification Symbol Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further information. NOTE:Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months, whichever occurs first. This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425 CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Engine Oil Viscosity – 3.6L Engine SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Comtemperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature partment” illustration in this section. starting and vehicle fuel economy. Synthetic Engine Oils Engine Oil Viscosity – 2.4L Engine The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on the engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed. Materials Added To Engine Oil Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certifiThe manufacturer strongly recommends against the addication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the should not be used. 7 426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its quality filters should be used to assure most efficient performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended. Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil Engine Air Cleaner Filter filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscrimi- Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper nately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. maintenance intervals. Contact your authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil WARNING! filters can be safely discarded in your area. The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can Engine Oil Filter provide a measure of protection in the case of engine The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for at every engine oil change. repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near Engine Oil Filter Selection the engine compartment before starting the vehicle This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality removed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high injury. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427 Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended. Maintenance-Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required. NOTE: The battery is stored in a compartment behind the left front fender and is accessible without removing the tire and wheel. Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump-starting. Refer to “Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. To access the battery, turn the steering wheel fully to the right and remove the inner fender shield. WARNING! • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. • Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other. • Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. 7 428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! • It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion. • If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage. Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time. CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429 WARNING! • Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD, for further warranty information. • The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician. Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment. NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor oil, and refrigerants. A/C Air Filter – If Equipped Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. WARNING! Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is operating or personal injury may result. 7 430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE The A/C Air Filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind 5. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter the glove box. Perform the following procedure to recover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover. place the filter: 1. Open the glove box and remove all contents. 2. Push in on the sides of the glove box and lower the door. 3. Disconnect the glove box door dampener from the slot on the side of the box. This is done by grasping the dampener connector (on the outside of the box) and the end of the connector pin (on the inside of the box) with your thumb and forefinger and pulling outward while lightly lifting upward on the door with your other hand. Once disconnected, the dampener will A/C Air Filter Replacement retract underneath the instrument panel if you release 6. Remove the A/C Air Filter by pulling it straight out of it. the housing. 4. Pivot the glove box downward. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431 7. Install the A/C Air Filter with the arrow on the filter pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the cover. CAUTION! The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to install the filter properly will result in the need to replace it more often. MOPAR威 Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small 8. Reinstall the glove box door dampener and glove box. amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威 Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. Body Lubrication Windshield Wiper Blades Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri- windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film. 7 432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield. reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water. When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with blades clean. This will help blade performance. petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend- in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This performance of blades may be present with chattering, rating information can be found on most washer fluid marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions containers. are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necesWARNING! sary. Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer and the rear window washer share the same fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433 Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. WARNING! • Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. • A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn. 7 434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! • The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine. • Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle. Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage. NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435 To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam- Cooling System age: • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion. • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle. • Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions. WARNING! • When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at anytime the ignition switch is in the ON position. • You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot. 7 436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Coolant Checks Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser. If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. Selection Of Coolant Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub- Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437 CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) • Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, it should be replaced with the specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible. • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator. • This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended. (Continued) Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance 7 438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE period, it is important that you use the same engine Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maincoolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle. tain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where Please review these recommendations for using Organic the vehicle is operated. Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze). NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): recommended and can result in cooling system damage. • We recommend using MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant Drain, flush, and refill as soon as possible to avoid 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive damage if coolant types are mixed in an emergency. Technology). Cooling System Pressure Cap • Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34° F (−37° C) are coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant anticipated. recovery tank. • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439 WARNING! • The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure. • Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result. Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately. Coolant Level Four-Cylinder Engines – the coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the engine coolant (antifreeze) level is adequate. With the engine idling and warm to normal operating temperature, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the “ADD” and “FULL” lines, shown on the bottle. Six-Cylinder Engines – the level of the engine coolant Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is (antifreeze) in the pressurized coolant bottle should be a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check between the “COLD” and “FULL” range on the bottle with your local authorities to determine the disposal when the engine is cold. 7 440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month. When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill. Points To Remember If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate. • Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. • Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing. • If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/ required, the cooling system should be pressure tested kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming for leaks. from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at 50% OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum) and humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapordistilled water for proper corrosion protection of your ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine engine which contains aluminum components. coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441 • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed. • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean. WARNING! Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency. • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) Master Cylinder – Brake Fluid Level Check performance, poor gas mileage, and increased Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately emissions. if the brake system warning light indicates system failure. Brake System In order to assure brake system performance, all brake Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when persystem components should be inspected periodically. forming underhood services. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. 7 442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed. Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. WARNING! • Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir. (Continued) MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision. • Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces. • Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. This could result in a collision. (Continued) Automatic Transmission Selection Of Lubricant It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid. 7 444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered transmission; only the approved lubricant should be product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addiused. tives to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid CAUTION! leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac- adversely affect seals. turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter CAUTION! shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and the chemicals can damage your transmission compoGenuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for nents. Such damage is not covered by the New fluid specifications. Vehicle Limited Warranty. Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445 6. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot or cold. Hot fluid is approximately 180° F (82° C), Use the following procedure to check the transmission which is the normal operating temperature after the fluid level properly: vehicle is driven at least 15 miles (24 km). Hot fluid 1. Park the vehicle on level ground. cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips. Cold fluid is at a temperature of approximately 80° F 2. Run the engine at normal idle speed for at least 60 (27° C). seconds, and leave the engine running for the rest of this procedure. 7. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert it until seated. Then, remove the dipstick and note the fluid level on 3. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brake both sides. The fluid level reading is only valid if there pedal. is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick. 4. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posiNote that the holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid tion (allowing time for the transmission to fully enif the actual level is at or above the hole. gage in each position), ending with the shift lever in • If the fluid is hot, the fluid level should be in the PARK. crosshatched area marked “HOT” (between the upper two holes in the dipstick). 5. Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to prevent dirt • If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between from entering the transmission. the lower two holes in the area marked “COLD.” Fluid Level Check – Four-Speed Transmission 7 446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE If the fluid level is low, add fluid through the dipstick tube to bring it to the proper level. Do not overfill. After adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick tube, wait at least two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level. 8. Check for leaks. Release the parking brake. To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid, make sure that the dipstick cap is properly reseated. CAUTION! • Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fluid specifications. • Dirt and water in the transmission can cause serious damage. To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid, make sure that the dipstick cap is re-seated properly. Fluid Level Check – Six-Speed Transmission The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447 Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using a special service dipstick. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage. passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection. The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper resistance built into your vehicle. maintenance intervals. What Causes Corrosion? In addition, change the fluid and filter if the transmission Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of is disassembled for any reason. paint and protective coatings from your vehicle. Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion The most common causes are: Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion • Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation. Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads • Stone and gravel impact. Fluid And Filter Changes 7 448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE • Insects, tree sap and tar. • Salt in the air near seacoast localities. • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants. Washing CAUTION! • Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces. • Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals. • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water. Special Care • If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu- • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once and Tar Remover to remove. a month. • Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威 • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint. open. • Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449 • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, Wheel And Wheel Trim Care touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is • All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and considered the responsibility of the owner. chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly • If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, • To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner. cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner. • If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed. • If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel. • Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle. CAUTION! Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These products may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. 7 450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cleaning Headlights Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog Equipped lights (if equipped) that are lighter and less susceptible to Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner: stone breakage than glass headlights. • Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore with a clean, dry towel. different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. • Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel. To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and • For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean, or a reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution folstain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. lowed by rinsing. • For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses. a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. • Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451 Interior Care Cleaning Leather Upholstery Instrument Panel Cover MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recomThe instrument panel cover has a low glare surface, mended for leather upholstery. which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular use protectants or other products, which may cause cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn restore the low glare surface. soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR威 Cleaning Interior Trim Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be taken to avoid Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR威 Total Clean or equiva- not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, lent, then MOPAR威 Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholif absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or stery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to Armor All威. Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to maintain the original condition. clean vinyl upholstery 7 452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm. Glass Surfaces When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror. Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic. All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner, or any commercial 1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear wincleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear rag. quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may 2. Dry with a soft cloth. scratch the elements. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453 Seat Belt Maintenance Cleaning Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical Soak the rubber cupholder liner in a mixture of medium solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Let soak for approximately one hour. After one hour pull the liner from the water and dip it back into the water If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR威 Total Clean, a about six times. This will loosen any remaining debris. mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water. the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the outer cloth. surfaces with a clean soft cloth. Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the Installation buckles do not work properly. Align the liner in the cupholder and press down firmly. Cleaning Center Console Cupholders Removal Grab the rubber portion of the cupholder and lift upward. 7 454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FUSES Integrated Power Module The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the air cleaner assembly. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A label that identifies each component may be printed on the inside of the cover. Refer to the graphic below for FUSES/TIPM location. Integrated Power Module Cavity 1 Cartridge Fuse 40 Amp Green Mini Fuse — Description Power Top Module – If Equipped MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455 2 Cartridge Fuse — 3 — 4 — 5 — 6 — Cavity 7 — Mini Fuse 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red 30 Amp Green Description Brake Vacuum Pump Center High Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL)/ Brake Switch Ignition Switch Trailer Tow – If Equipped Power Mirror Switch/Climate Controls Ignition Off Draw (IOD) Sense 1 Cavity 8 Cartridge Fuse — Mini Fuse 30 Amp Green 9 40 Amp Green 10 — 20 Amp Yellow 11 — 15 Amp Lt Blue 12 — 13 — 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow Description Ignition Off Draw (IOD) Sense 2 Battery Feed – Power Seats – If Equipped Instrument Panel/ Power Locks/ Interior Lights Selectable Power Outlet (Inside Center Arm Rest) — Ignition/Cigar Lighter 7 456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity 14 15 Cartridge Fuse — 16 40 Amp Green — 17 — 18 19 40 Amp Green — Mini Fuse 10 Amp Red — 15 Amp Lt. Blue 10 Amp Red — 20 Amp Yellow Instrument Panel 20 Cartridge Fuse — Radiator Fan Relay 21 — Sunroof – If Equipped Wireless Control Module (WCM)/ Clock/Steering Control Module (SCM) Auto Shutdown (ASD) Relay Audio Amplifier – If Equipped 22 — 23 — 24 — 25 — Description Cavity Mini Fuse 15 Amp Lt. Blue 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 15 Amp Lt. Blue 25 Amp Natural 10 Amp Red Description Radio Siren – If Equipped Ignition Run – Climate Controls/Hot Cupholder – If Equipped Auto Shutdown (ASD) Relay 3 Sunroof – If Equipped Ignition Run — Heated Mirrors - If Equipped MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457 26 Cartridge Fuse — 27 — Cavity 28 29 — — Mini Fuse 15 Amp Lt. Blue 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red — Description Cavity Auto Shutdown (ASD) Relay 2 Ignition Run – Occupant Classification Module (OCM)/Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Ignition Run — Occupant Classification Module (OCM)/Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Hot Car (No Fuse Required) 30 31 32 33 Cartridge Fuse — Mini Fuse 20 Amp Yellow — 30 Amp Pink — — — 10 Amp Red Description Ignition Run – Heated Seats – If Equipped Spare Auto Shutdown (ASD) Relay 1 Switch Bank/ Diagnostic Link Connector/ Powertrain Control Module (PCM) 7 458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity 34 35 Cartridge Fuse 30 Amp Pink 40 Amp Green Mini Fuse — — Description Cavity Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS) Module – If Equipped/ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Module – If Equipped Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS) Module – If Equipped/ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Module – If Equipped 36 37 Cartridge Fuse 30 Amp Pink Mini Fuse — — 25 Amp Natural Description Passenger Door Module (PDM)/ Driver Door Module (DDM) Power Top Module – If Equipped MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459 CAUTION! • When installing the Integrated Power Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in an electrical system failure. • When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. VEHICLE STORAGE If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21 days, you may want to take steps to preserve your battery. • Disengage the mini-fuse in the Power Distribution Center labeled IOD (Ignition Off-Draw). • Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery. • Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again. 7 460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE REPLACEMENT BULBS Exterior Bulbs Interior Bulbs Front Courtesy/ Reading Lamp Center Courtesy/ Reading Lamp Visor Vanity Lamp Glove Box Lamp Shift Indicator Lamp Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp Bulb Number 578/W5W 578/W5W A6220 A6220 IKLE14140 579 NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement. Bi-Halogen Headlamp Front Turn Signal Lamp Front Park Lamp Front Fog Lamp Center High Mounted Stop (CHMSL) Lamp Rear Tail/Stop/ Turn Signal Lamp Backup Lamp License Lamp Bulb Number HIR2 3157NAK LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) H11 LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) 921 W5W MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461 BULB REPLACEMENT Headlamp 1. Raise and prop open the hood. Locate the connector behind the headlamp. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the air cleaner filter housing and position the totally integrated power module aside prior to replacing the low beam headlamp on the driver’s side of the vehicle. 2. Reach into engine compartment and from behind the lamp assembly and grasp the connector. 3. Rotate bulb and connector one-quarter turn and pull outward from assembly. 7 462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. 4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace the bulb. 5. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol. 6. Reinsert the bulb and socket assembly and rotate clockwise one-quarter turn to secure. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463 Front Turn Signal 1. Raise and prop open the hood. 1. Rotate the bulb’s electrical connector one-quarter turn counterclockwise and remove it from the fog lamp housing. 2. Rotate the bulb’s electrical connector one-quarter turn 2. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install counterclockwise and remove it from the headlamp the replacement bulb. housing. 3. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install the replacement bulb. 4. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the headlamp housing and rotate the connector onequarter turn clockwise to lock it in place. Front Fog Lamp NOTE: Access to the lamps through the lower fascia cutout is limited. We recommend you access the lamps by turning the steering wheel to allow access and remove the inner fender shield. CAUTION! Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol. 3. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the fog lamp housing and rotate the connector one-quarter turn clockwise to lock it in place. 7 464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: Placing a small flat head screwdriver or similar tool between the lamp outboard ball stud and plastic 1. Open the trunk and gently pull back the trunk liner grommet from inside the trunk can help to disengage the behind the tail lamp (requires removal of a push pin outboard edge of the tail lamp. holding the trunk trim in place near the tail lamp). 3. Grasp the tail lamp by both the outboard and inboard 2. Remove the two plastic wing nuts from the tail lamp sides, and pull firmly to disengage the tail lamp from housing. the vehicle. Backup Lamps NOTE: It is normal to hear a loud sound when the lower tail lamp area unsnaps from the vehicle mounting bracket during tail lamp removal. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465 License Plate Lamp 1. Using a small screwdriver, press inward the locking tab on the side of the lamp assembly and pull down on the lamp assembly for removal. 2. Pull bulb from socket, replace, and reinstall the lamp assembly into place ensuring the locking tab is secure. 4. Twist and remove socket from lamp. 5. Remove bulb from socket and replace. 6. Reinstall the tail lamp, fasteners, and trunk liner. 7 466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FLUID CAPACITIES Fuel (Approximate) All Engines — (Except 2.4L PZEV) 2.4L PZEV (Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle) Engine Oil With Filter 2.4L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) Cooling System* 2.4L Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) 3.6L Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) * Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX U.S. Metric 16.9 Gallons 18.5 Gallons 64 Liters 70 Liters 4.5 Quarts 6 Quarts 4.4 Liters 5.6 Liters 7.7 Quarts 7.3 Liters 11.6 Quarts 11 Liters level. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Engine Coolant Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine Engine Oil Filter Spark Plugs – 2.4L Engine except PZEV* Spark Plugs – 2.4L with PZEV* Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine Fuel Selection * PZEV = Partial Zero Emission Vehicle Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part We recommend you use MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology). We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. We recommend you use MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter. We recommend you use MOPAR威 Spark Plugs. We recommend you use MOPAR威 Spark Plugs. We recommend you use MOPAR威 Spark Plugs. 87 Octane 7 468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Chassis Component Automatic Transmission Brake Master Cylinder Power Steering Reservoir Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part We recommend you use MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid. We recommend you use MOPAR威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. We recommend you use MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid. M A I N T E N A ▫ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 N C E MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS 䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .470 S C H E D U L E S 8 M A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 470 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in indicator system. The oil change indicator system will “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inremind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for formation scheduled maintenance. NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change interBased on engine operation conditions, the oil change vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months, indicator message will illuminate. This means that serwhichever comes first. vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip: cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will • Check engine oil level influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the • Check windshield washer fluid level change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as • Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual wear or damage soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km). • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator master cylinder, power steering and transmission as message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a needed scheduled oil change is performed by someone other MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 471 M • Check function of all interior and exterior lights Required Maintenance Intervals. Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following page for the required maintenance intervals. At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System: • Change oil and filter. • Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on. • Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required. • Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped with dipstick. • Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake. At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System: • Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses. • Inspect exhaust system. • Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions. A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 8 Additional Inspections Inspect the CV joints. Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot seals and replace if necessary. Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. Additional Maintenance Replace engine air filter. Replace cabin/air conditioning filter. 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 S C H E D U L E S 2 32,000 M 472 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES A I Maintenance Chart N Mileage or time passed T (whichever comes first) E N A Or Years: N Or Kilometers: C E X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Replace spark plugs (2.4L Engine). ** Replace spark plugs (2.4L PZEV Engine Only). ** Replace spark plugs (3.6L Engine). ** Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first. 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 Or Years: Or Kilometers: 20,000 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 32,000 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 473 M X X X X X X X X X A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 S C H E D U L E S 8 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing. Change automatic transmission fluid and filter. Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 M 474 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES A I Mileage or time passed N (whichever comes first) T E N Or Years: A Or Kilometers: N C E X ** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply. X X MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 475 M WARNING! • You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. • Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident. A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS 䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479 ▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 ▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .479 ▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 ▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 ▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .479 䡵 MOPAR威 PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .483 ▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .480 ▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .480 ▫ In Mexico contact: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 ▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 ▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 9 478 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .484 ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 ▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486 ▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 479 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealer, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment. If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE current problem. The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally Prepare A List interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services. specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an service advisor know. authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the 9 480 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) correctly and in a timely manner. • Vehicle delivery date and mileage This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center solved with this process. P.O. Box 21–8004 • If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. Phone: (800) 247–9753 They want to know if you need assistance. • If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621 center. Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French ter should include the following information: • Owner’s name and address • Owner’s telephone number (home and office) IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 481 Mexico, D. F. Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator. In Mexico City: 5081-7568 Service Contract Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300 You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French). In Mexico contact: Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 Sante Fe C.P. 05109 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY. 9 482 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents. We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns. WARNING! Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market. IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 483 campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your authorized MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are dealer, and the manufacturer. available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– operating at its best. 9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could http://www.safercar.gov. cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety In Canada Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you manufacturer. should contact the Customer Service Department immeIf NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in defect to the Canadian government should contact Transa group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety/ MOPAR姞 PARTS 9 484 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order form. Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootNOTE: A street address is required when ordering ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests manuals (no P.O. Boxes). and a complete list of all tools and equipment. Service Manuals Owner’s Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforThese Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the mation that students and professional technicians need in assistance of service and engineering specialists to acdiagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintainquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles. ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC veIncluded are starting, operating, emergency and maintehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips. language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts. IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 485 Call toll free at: Treadwear • 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.) The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate. • 1–800–387–1143 (Canada) Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: • www.techauthority.com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES Traction Grades The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle. The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforAll passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety mance. requirements in addition to these grades. 9 486 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE WARNING! The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law. WARNING! The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. INDEX 10 488 INDEX About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .437 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432 Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367 Airbag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .426 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Antenna, Satellite Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .19 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 Assistance Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .279 Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 INDEX 489 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445 Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445 Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444 Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427 Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .26 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427 Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning Light . . . . . . . . . Brake/Transmission Interlock . Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441 .324 .441 .441 .322 .213 .301 .460 .101 Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . .21 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466 Caps, Filler Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 10 490 INDEX Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .420 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 Cleaning Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449 Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Connector UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . .265 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .438 Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436 Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439 Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439 Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440 INDEX 491 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 Disposal Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421 E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192 Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .176 Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .225 Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .436 Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Crankcase Ventilation Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479 Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 10 492 INDEX Emergency, In Case of Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .420 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418 Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418 Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424 Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425 Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 INDEX 493 Fabric Care. . . . . . . . . . . . Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . Filters Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . Air Conditioning . . . . . Automatic Transmission Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . Engine Oil Disposal . . . Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hazard Warning . . . . . Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . Flexible Fuel Vehicles Cruising Range . . . . . . Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Requirements . . . . Maintenance . . . . . . . . Replacement Parts . . . . Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 . . . . . . . . . . .296 . . . . . . . . . . .466 . . . . . . . . . . .101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445 .441 .436 .423 .468 .467 .168 .463 .160 .409 .364 .373 .367 .365 .365 10 494 INDEX Filler Cap (Gas Cap) Filler Door (Gas Cap) Gasoline . . . . . . . . . Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . Light . . . . . . . . . . . Materials Added . . . Methanol . . . . . . . . Octane Rating . . . . . Requirements . . . . . Tank Capacity . . . . . Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel System Caution . . . Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 .210 .364 .210 .211 .367 .365 .364 .364 .466 .369 .373 .374 .454 Gauges Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452 Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Hazard Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461 INDEX 495 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . .167 On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Hitches Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Hood Prop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452 Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454 Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 10 496 INDEX Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405 Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 Keyless Entry System (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . .332 Knee Bolster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 INDEX 497 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . .221 Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461 Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .220 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . .210 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427 .422 .470 .221 .484 .169 .441 10 498 INDEX Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421 MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Indicator . . . . . Oil Change Indicator, Reset Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . Change Interval . . . . . . Checking . . . . . . . . . . Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filter Disposal . . . . . . . Identification Logo . . . . Materials Added to . . . Recommendation . . . . . Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 .214 .216 .216 .423 .466 .216 .423 .423 .426 .426 .426 .424 .425 .424 .425 .425 .426 .212 INDEX 499 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419 Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419 Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Personal Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .340 Power Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . .192 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395 Pretensioners Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 .438 .274 .272 .197 .160 .107 .202 10 500 INDEX Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429 Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Remote Control Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Remote Keyless Entry (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .272 Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Remote Trunk Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470 Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . .51 And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 INDEX 501 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Seat Belts (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 Security Alarm (Theft Alarm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 Setting the Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) . . . . . . . . . . . .287 Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 10 502 INDEX Taillights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .279 Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . .210 Theft Alarm (Security Alarm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . . .339 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 Steering Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .272 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459 Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409 Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .60 Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425 INDEX 503 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... .... .... ... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 .352 .339 .356 .220 .485 .347 .353 .355 .333 .335 .348 .394 .351 .385 .352 .333 .381 .377 24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 Towing Assistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388 Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386 Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 Transaxle Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443 10 504 INDEX Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 Trip Odometer Reset Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217 Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425 Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265 Uconnect威 (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .210 Understanding Your Instrument Panel. . . . . . . . . . .208 Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .265 INDEX 505 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 Washer Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 Water Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449 Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 10 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation. The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection should not be fused. Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped. The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded coaxial cable. Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR). Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions. All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s electronic systems. Chrysler Group LLC 13C41-126-AC 300 3rd Edition Printed in U.S.A.